Just in Time Geometry

S
JU T
IN
I M
E
Geometry
Catherine V. Jeremko
N E W YO R K
Copyright © 2004 LearningExpress, LLC.
All rights reserved under International and Pan-American Copyright Conven-

tions. Published in the United States by LearningExpress, LLC, New York.
Library of Congress Cataloging-in-Publication Data:

Jeremko, Cathy.
Just in time geometry / Catherine Jeremko.—1st ed.
p. cm.
ISBN 1-57865-514-7 (pbk. : alk. paper)
1. Geometry—Study and teaching (Elementary)
I. Title.
QA461.J47 2004
516—dc22
2003027068
Printed in the United States of America
987654321
First Edition
ISBN 1–57685–514–7
For more information or to place an order, contact LearningExpress at:

55 Broadway
8th Floor
New York, NY 10006
Or visit us at:
www.learnatest.com
ABOUT THE AUTHOR
Catherine V. Jeremko is a certified secondary mathematics teacher in New

York State. She is the author of Just in Time Math, has contributed to 501
Quantitative Comparison Questions, and has edited two publications, GMAT
Success! and the second edition of 501 Algebra Questions, all published by
LearningExpress. She currently teaches seventh grade mathematics at
Vestal Middle School in Vestal, New York. Ms. Jeremko is also a teacher
trainer for the use of technology in the mathematics classroom. She resides
in Apalachin, New York with her three daughters.
CONTENTS
Formula Cheat Sheet ix

Introduction xi
1 Study Skills 1
2 Building Blocks of Geometry: Points, Lines, and Angles 16
3 Special Angle Pairs and Angle Measurement 47
4 Triangles 78
5 Quadrilaterals and Circles 116
6 Perimeter and Area 167
7 Surface Area and Volume 201
8 Transformations and Similarity 236
9 Pythagorean Theorem and Trigonometry 269
10 Coordinate Geometry 314
v
FORMULA CHEAT SHEET
PERIMETER
Rectangle: P = 2 l + 2 w
Square: P = 4 s
CIRCUMFERENCE OF A CIRCLE
C = π d or C = 2 π r
AREA
1
Triangle: A = 2 b h Rectangle: A = b h
1
Trapezoid: A = 2 h (b1 + b2) Circle: A = πr2
SURFACE AREA
Rectangular Prism: SA = 2(l w) + 2(l h) + 2(w h)
Cube: SA = 6s2
Cylinder: 2(πr2) + 2πrh
Sphere: 4πr2
VOLUME V = b h (the area of the base times the height)

Rectangular Solid: V = l w h
Cylinder: V = π r2 h
Cube: V = s3
1
Triangular Prism: 2 bh1 h2
1
Trapezoidal Prism: 2 h1 (b1 + b2) h2
4
Sphere: 3 πr3
1
Pyramid: 3 lwh
1
Cone: 3 πr2h
PYTHAGOREAN THEOREM
leg2 + leg2 = hypotenuse2, or a2 + b2 = c2
"
vii
TRIGONOMETRIC RATIOS
(SOH – CAH – TOA)
length of opposite side
Sine of an angle:
length of hypotenuse
length of adjacent side
Cosine of an angle:
length of hypotenuse
length of opposite side
Tangent of an angle:
length of adjacent side
COORDINATE GEOMETRY
x1 + x2 y1 + y2
Midpoint of a segment: M = (2, 2)

Distance between two points: D = (x2 – x
1) + (y
2
2 – y1)
2
the change in the y-coordinate’s value Δy

Slope of a line: ,
the change in the x-coordinate’s value or Δx ,
y2 – y1 rise
or
x2 – x1 , or run
Slope-intercept form of a line: y = mx + b, where m is the slope
and b is the y-intercept
Introduction
Y ou have to face a big exam that will test your geometry skills. It
is just a few weeks, perhaps even just a few days, from now. You
haven’t begun to study. Perhaps you just haven’t had the time. We are all
faced with full schedules and many demands on our time, including work,
family, and other obligations. Or perhaps you have had the time, but pro-
crastinated; topics in geometry are topics that you would rather avoid at
all costs. Formulas and geometric figures have never been your strong
suit. It is possible that you have waited until the last minute because you
feel rather confident in your mathematical skills, and just want a quick
refresher on the major topics. Maybe you just realized that your test
included a mathematics section, and now you have only a short time to
prepare.
If any of these scenarios sounds familiar, then Just in Time Geometry is
the right book for you. Designed specifically for last-minute test prepa-
ration, Just in Time Geometry is a fast, accurate way to build the essential
skills necessary to tackle formulas and geometry-related problems. This
book includes nine chapters of geometry topics, with an additional chap-
ter on study skills to make your time effective. In just ten short chapters,
you will get the essentials—just in time for passing your big test.
THE JUST IN TIME TEST-PREP APPROACH
At LearningExpress, we know the importance that is placed on test

scores. Whether you are preparing for the PSAT, SAT, GRE, GMAT, a
civil service exam, or you simply need to improve your fundamental
mathematical skills, our Just in Time streamlined approach can work for
you. Each chapter includes:
• a ten-question benchmark quiz to help you assess your knowledge

of the topics and skills in the chapter
• a lesson covering the essential content for the topic of the
chapter
ix
x J U ST I N TI M E G E O M ETRY
• sample problems with full explanations

• calculator tips to make the most of technology on your exam
• specific tips and strategies to prepare for the exam
• a 25-question practice quiz followed by detailed answers and expla-
nations to help you measure your progress
Our Just in Time series also includes the following features:
• Extra Help sidebars that refer you to other Learning-

O Express skill builders or other resources, such as
Internet sites, that can help you learn more about a
particular topic
• Calculator Tips: offers hints on how your calculator can
•
i help you.
Glossary sidebars with key definitions
•
E Rule Book sidebars highlighting the rules that you
absolutely need to know
Shortcut sidebars with tips for reducing your study

" time—without sacrificing accuracy
• A Formula Cheat Sheet with common formulas for last-minute test

preparation
Of course, no book can cover every type of problem you may face on a
given test. But this book is not just about recognizing specific problem
types; it is also about building those essential skills, confidence, and
processes that will ensure success when faced with a geometry problem.
The topics in this book have been carefully chosen to reflect not only what
you are likely to see on an exam, but also what you are likely to come across
regularly in books, newspapers, lectures, and other daily activities.
HOW TO USE THIS BOOK
While each chapter can stand on its own as an effective review of mathe-
matical content, this book will be most effective if you complete each chap-
ter in order, beginning with Chapter 1. Chapters 2 and 3 review the basic
knowledge of simple geometric figures. Chapters 4 and 5 review common
I NTR O D U CTI O N xi
geometric figures. The material in Chapters 6 and 7 is concerned with geo-

metric measurement. Chapters 8, 9, and 10 cover applications of geometry
and coordinate geometry. The chapters are arranged such that material cov-
ered earlier chapters may be referenced in a later chapter.
Below is a brief outline of each chapter:
• Chapter 1: Study Skills reviews fundamental study strategies

including budgeting your time, creating a study plan, and using
study aids such as flashcards.
• Chapter 2: Building Blocks of Geometry: Points, Lines, and
Angles reviews the simplest geometric constructs.
• Chapter 3: Special Angle Pairs and Angle Measurement
reviews basic information about angles and angle relationships.
• Chapter 4: Triangles reviews the most common geometric figure
and its properties.
• Chapter 5: Quadrilaterals and Circles reviews the four-sided
polygon and the round geometric figure, and their properties.
• Chapter 6: Perimeter and Area reviews both the measurements
around a geometric figure and the measurements that cover a
figure.
• Chapter 7: Surface Area and Volume is concerned with wrapping
a three-dimensional solid and filling a geometric solid.
• Chapter 8: Transformations and Similarity reviews the move-
ment of congruent figures and figures that have the same shape, but
a different size.
• Chapter 9: Pythagorean Theorem and Trigonometry is con-
cerned with two very important applications of the triangle.
• Chapter 10: Coordinate Geometry reviews the important rela-
tionship between geometry and the coordinate plane.
Depending upon how much time you have before the exam, review as
much as possible. If time is short, start your review with the chapters that
address your weaknesses. The ten-question benchmark quiz at the start of
each chapter can help you assess your strengths and weaknesses.
Finally, remain calm and think positively. Your big test may be just a short
while away, but you are taking the steps you need to prepare . . . just in time.
1
Study Skills
I f you have left studying for that big test until the last minute, you
may be feeling that your only option is to cram. You might be feeling
panicky that you will never have enough time to learn what you need to
know. But the “Just in Time” solution is exactly that: just in time. This
means that with the help of this book you can use your available time
prior to your test effectively. First, to get ready for your test just in time,
you need a plan. This chapter will help you put together a study plan that
maximizes your time and tailors your learning strategy to your needs and
goals.
There are four main factors that you need to consider when creating
your study plan: what to study, where to study, when to study, and how
to study. When you put these four factors together, you can create a spe-
cific plan that will allow you to accomplish more—in less time. If you have
three weeks, two weeks, or even one week to get ready, you can create a
plan that avoids anxiety-inducing cramming and focuses on real learning
by following the simple steps in this chapter.
WHAT TO STUDY
Finding out what you need to study for your test is the first step in cre-
ating an effective study plan. You need to have a good measure of your
1
2 J U ST I N TI M E G E O M ETRY
ability in geometry. You can accomplish this by looking over the Contents
to see what looks familiar to you and by answering the benchmark quiz
questions starting in the next chapter. You also need to know what exactly
is covered on the test you will be taking. Considering both your ability and
the test content will tell you what you need to study.
◗ Establish a Benchmark
In each chapter you will take a short, ten-question benchmark quiz that will
help you assess your skills. This may be one of the most important steps in
creating your study plan. Because you have limited time, you need to be
very efficient in your studies. Once you take a benchmark quiz and analyze
the results, you will be able to avoid studying the material you already know.
This will allow you to focus on those areas that need the most attention.
A benchmark quiz is only practice. If you do not do as well as you antic-
ipate, do not be alarmed and certainly do not despair. The purpose of the
quiz is to help you focus your efforts so that you can improve. It is impor-
tant to analyze your results carefully. Look beyond your score, and consider
why you answered some questions incorrectly. Here are some questions to
ask yourself when you review your wrong answers:
• Did you get the question wrong because the material was totally
unfamiliar?
• Was the material familiar but you were unable to come up with the
right answer? In this case, when you read the right answer it will
often make perfect sense. You might even think, “I knew that!”
• Did you answer incorrectly because you read the question care-
lessly?
• Did you make another careless mistake? For example, did you circle
choice a when you meant to circle choice b?
Next, look at the questions you answered correctly and review how you
came up with the right answer. Not all right answers are created equally.
• Did you simply know the right answer?

• Did you make an educated guess? An educated guess might indicate
that you have some familiarity with the subject, but you probably
need at least a quick review.
• Did you make a lucky guess? A lucky guess means that you don’t
know the material and you will need to learn it.
Your performance on the benchmark quiz will tell you several important
things. First, it will tell you how much you need to study. For example, if
STU DY S K I LLS 3
you got eight out of ten questions right (not counting lucky guesses!), you
might only need to brush up on certain geometry topics. But if you got five
out of ten questions wrong, you will need a thorough review. Second, it can
tell you what you know well, that is, which subjects you don’t need to study.
Third, you will determine which subjects you need to study in-depth and
which subjects you simply need to review briefly.
◗ Target Your Test

For the “Just in Time” test-taker, it is important to focus your study efforts
to match what is needed for your test. You don’t want to waste your time
learning something that will not be covered on your test. There are three
important aspects that you should know about your test before developing
your study plan:
• What material is covered?

• What is the format of the test? Is it multiple choice? Fill in the
blank? Some combination? Or something else?
• What is the level of difficulty?
How can you learn about the test before you take it? For most stan-
dardized tests, there are sample tests available. These tests—which have
been created to match the test that you will take—are probably the best way
to learn what will be covered. If your test is non-standardized, you should
ask your instructor specific questions about the upcoming test.
You should also know how your score will affect your goal. For example,
if you are taking the SAT exam, and the median math score of students
accepted at your college of choice is 550, then you should set your sights on
achieving a score of 550 or better. Or, if you are taking the New York City
Police Officer exam, you know that you need to get a perfect or near-perfect
score to get a top slot on the list. Conversely, some exams are simply pass or
fail. In this case, you can focus your efforts on achieving a passing score.
◗ Match Your Abilities to Your Test

Now that you understand your strengths and weaknesses and you know
what to expect of your test, you need to consider both factors to determine
what material you need to study. First, look at the subject area or question
type with which you have the most trouble. If you can expect to find ques-
tions of this type on your test, then this subject might be your first prior-
ity. But be sure to consider how much of the test will cover this material.
For example, if there will only be a few questions out of one hundred that
test your knowledge of a subject that is your weakest area, you might decide
not to study this subject area at all. You might be better served by concen-
trating on solidifying your grasp of the main material covered on the exam.
The important thing to remember is that you want to maximize your
time. You don’t want to study material that you already know. And you don’t
want to study material that you don’t need to know. You will make the best
use of your time if you study the material that you know the least, but that
you most need to know.
WHERE TO STUDY
The environment in which you choose to study can have a dramatic impact
on how successful your studying is. If you choose to study in a noisy coffee
shop at a small table with dim lighting, it might take you two hours to cover
the same material you could read in an hour in the quiet of the library. That
is an hour that you don’t have to lose! However, for some people the noisy
coffee shop is the ideal environment. You need to determine what type of
study environment works for you.
◗ Consider Your Options

Your goal is to find a comfortable, secure place that is free from distractions.
The place should also be convenient and conform to your schedule. For
example, the library might be ideal in many respects. However, if it takes
you an hour to get there and it closes soon after you arrive, you are not max-
imizing your study time.
For many people, studying at home is a good solution. Home is always
open and you don’t waste any time getting there, but it can have drawbacks.
If you are trying to fit studying in between family obligations, you might
find that working from home offers too many opportunities for distraction.
Chores that have piled up, children or younger siblings who need your
attention, or television that captures your interest, are just some of things
that might interfere with studying at home. Maybe you have roommates
who will draw your attention away from your studies. Studying at home is
a good solution if you have a room that you can work in alone and away
from any distractions.
If home is not a good environment for quiet study, the library, a reading
room, or a coffee shop are places you can consider. Be sure to pick a place
that is relatively quiet and which provides enough workspace for your needs.
STU DY S K I LLS 5
◗ Noise
Everyone has his or her own tolerance for noise. Some people need absolute
silence to concentrate, while others will be distracted without some sort of
background noise. Classical music can be soothing and might help you relax
as you study. In fact, studies have shown that listening to classical music actu-
ally enhances math performance. If you think you work better with music or
the television on, you should be sure that you are not paying attention to
what is on in the background. Try reading a chapter or doing some problems
in silence, then try the same amount of work with noise. Which noise level
allowed you to work the fastest?
◗ Light
You will need to have enough light to read comfortably. Light that is too
dim will strain your eyes and make you drowsy. Too bright and you will be
uncomfortable and tense. Experts suggest that the best light for reading
comes from behind and falls over your shoulder. Make sure your light
source falls on your book and does not shine in your eyes.
◗ Comfort
Your study place should be comfortable and conducive to work. While your
bed might be comfortable, studying in bed is probably more conducive to
sleeping than concentrated learning. You will need a comfortable chair that
offers good back support and a work surface—a desk or table—that gives
you enough space for your books and other supplies. Ideally, the tempera-
ture should be a happy medium between too warm and too cold. A stuffy
room will make you sleepy and a cold room is simply uncomfortable. If you
are studying outside your home, you may not be able to control the tem-
perature, but you can dress appropriately. For example, bring along an extra
sweater if your local library is skimpy with the heat.
◗ A Little Help
When you have settled on a place to study, you will need to enlist the help
of your family and friends—especially if you are working at home. Be sure
they know that when you go to your room and close the door that you do
not want to be disturbed. If your friends all go to the same coffee shop
where you plan to study, you will also need to ask them to respect your
study place. The cooperation of your family and friends will eliminate one
of the greatest potential distractions.
WHEN TO STUDY
Finding the time in your busy schedule may seem like the greatest hurdle
in making your “just in time” study plan, but you probably have more time
available than you think. It just takes a little planning and some creativity.
◗ Analyze Your Schedule

Your first step in finding time to study is to map out your day-to-day
schedule—in detail. Mark a piece of paper in fifteen-minute intervals from
the time you get up to the time you generally go to bed. Fill in each fifteen-
minute interval. For example, if you work from nine to five, do not simply
block that time off as unavailable for study. Write down your daily routine
at work and see when you might have some time to study. Lunch is an obvi-
ous time, but there may be other down times in your workday when you can
squeeze in a short study session.
You will want to set aside a stretch of time when you plan to study in your
designated study place. But, you can also be creative and find ways to study
for short bursts during your normal routine. For example, if you spend an
hour at the gym on the stationary bike, you can read while you cycle. Or,
you can review flashcards on your bus ride. If you drive to work, you could
record some study material on a tape or CD. You could also listen to this
tape while you walk the dog.
When you look at your schedule closely, you will probably find you have
more time than you thought. However, if you still don’t have the time you
need, you should rethink your routine. Can you ask someone to take on a
greater share of the household chores for the few weeks you need to get
ready for your test? Is there some activity that you can forgo for the next
few weeks? If you normally go to the gym six days a week for an hour and
a half, cut down to three days a week for forty-five minutes. You will add
over six and a half hours to your schedule without completely abandoning
your fitness routine. Remember, any changes you make to your schedule are
short-term and are a small sacrifice, once you consider your goal.
◗ Time Strategies
Now you know that when you have time available, you need to use that time
to your best advantage. You will probably find that you can set aside one
block of time during the day during which you will do the bulk of your
studying. Use this time to learn new material or take a practice quiz and
review your answers. Use the small spurts of time you have found in your
schedule to review with flashcards, cheat sheets, and other tools.
Also, consider your learning style and body rhythm when you make your
STU DY S K I LLS 7
schedule. Does it take you some time to get into material? If so, you should
build a schedule with longer blocks of time. Do you have a short attention
span? Then you will do better with a schedule of several shorter study peri-
ods. No matter your style, avoid extremes. Neither very long study sessions
nor very short (except for quick reviews) sessions are an efficient use of time.
Whether you are a morning person or a night owl, plan to study when you
are most energetic and alert.
Make sure your schedule allows for adequate rest and study breaks. Skip-
ping sleep is not a good way to find time in your schedule. Not only will you
be tired when you study, but also you will be sleep deprived by the time of
the test. A sleep-deprived test-taker is more likely to make careless mistakes,
lose energy and focus, and become stressed-out by the testing environment.
If you plan to do most of your studying in one block of time, say four hours,
be sure you leave time to take a study break. Experts have shown that stu-
dents are more likely to retain material if they take some time to digest it.
A five- or ten-minute break to stretch your legs or eat a snack will revive you
and give your brain time to absorb what you have learned.
HOW TO STUDY
How you study is just as important as how long—especially if your time is

limited. You will need to be in a good physical and mental state. And you
will need to use the right tools for the job. You will also need to understand
your learning style so that you can select the best study method. And, per-
haps most important, you will need methods that will help you to remem-
ber not to memorize the material. All these techniques—using the right
tools and methods—will help you make the most of your study time.
◗ Sleep Well, Eat Right, and Relax

Does your idea of studying hard include images of staying up into the wee
hours and living on fast food and caffeine until the big test? Even though
it may seem like you are working hard when you study around the clock and
put aside good eating habits in order to save time, you are not working effi-
ciently. If you have ever pulled an all-nighter you know that by four in the
morning you can find yourself reading the same page several times without
understanding a word. Adequate rest and good nutrition will allow you to
be focused and energetic so you can get more work done in less time.
Most people need about eight hours of sleep a night. Do not sacrifice
sleep in order to make time to study. Hunger can be a distraction, so don’t
skip meals. Eat three nutritious meals a day, and keep healthy snacks on
hand during a long study session. The key word is healthy. Sugary snacks
might make you feel energized in the short term, but that sugar rush is fol-
lowed by a crash that will leave you feeling depleted. Caffeine can have a
similar effect. A little caffeine—a morning cup of coffee, for example—can
give you a boost, but too much caffeine will make you feel jittery and tense.
Tension can affect your ability to concentrate.
Being over-caffeinated is not the only potential source of tension. Pre-
exam anxiety can also get in the way of effective studying. If your anxiety
about the upcoming test is getting the better of you, try these simple relax-
ation techniques:
• Breathe! Sounds simple, and it is. Taking long, deep breaths can
drain the tension from your body. Place one hand on your stomach
and the other on your chest. Sit up straight. Inhale deeply through
your nose and feel your stomach inflate. Your chest should remain
still. Exhale slowly through your mouth and feel your stomach
deflate. It is the slow exhalation that helps you relax, so make sure
you take your time releasing your breath. Pausing during a study
session to take three deep breaths is a quick way to clear your mind
and body of tension so that you can better focus on your work.
• Tense and relax your muscles. You may not even notice it, but as
anxiety mounts, your muscles tense. You may tense your neck and
shoulders, your toes, or your jaw. This tension can interfere with
your concentration. Release the tension held in your muscles by
purposefully tensing then relaxing each muscle. Work from your
toes to your head systematically.
• Visualize a soothing place. Taking a break to mentally visit a place
that you find relaxing can be invigorating. Close your eyes and con-
jure up the sights, smells, and sounds of your favorite place. Really
try to feel like you are there for five uninterrupted minutes and you
will return from your mini vacation ready to study.
◗ The Right Tools for the Job

If you follow the steps above, you will have a rested, energized, and relaxed
brain—the most important tool you need to prepare for your exam. But
there are other tools that you will need to make your study session the most
productive. Be sure that you have all the supplies you need on hand before
you sit down to study. To help make studying more pleasant, select supplies
that you enjoy using. Here is a list of supplies that you will need:
• a notebook or legal pad dedicated to studying for your test

• graph paper
• pencils
STU DY S K I LLS 9
• pencil sharpener
• highlighter
• index or other note cards
• paper clips or sticky note pads for marking pages
• a calendar or personal digital assistant (which you will use to keep
track of your study plan)
• a calculator
◗ Break It Down
You may be feeling overwhelmed by the amount of material you have to
cover in a short time. This seeming mountain of work can generate anxi-
ety and even cause you to procrastinate further. Breaking down the work
into manageable chunks will help you plan your studying and motivate you
to get started. It will also help you organize the material in your mind.
When you begin to see the large topic as smaller units of information that
are connected, you will develop a deeper understanding of the subject. You
will also use these small chunks of information to build your study plan.
This will give you specific tasks to accomplish each day, rather than simply
having time set aside to study for the test.
For example, if you have difficulty with geometry, you could study a dif-
ferent geometry topic each day for a week: On Monday, practice working
with surface area; on Tuesday, work on Pythagorean theorem problems; on
Wednesday, try coordinate geometry; and so on. “Learn geometry” might
seem like an overwhelming task, but if you divide the work into smaller
pieces, you will find that your understanding of geometry improves with
practice and patience.
◗ Your Learning Style

Learning is not the same for everyone. People absorb information in dif-
ferent ways. Understanding how you learn will help you develop the most
effective study plan for your learning style. Experts have identified three
main types of learners: visual, auditory, and kinesthetic. Most people use a
combination of all three learning styles, but one style might be more dom-
inant. Here are some questions that will help you identify your dominant
learning style:
1. If you have to remember an unusual word, you most likely

a. picture the word in your mind.
b. repeat the word aloud several times.
c. trace out the letters with your finger.
2. When you meet new people, you remember them mostly by

a. their actions and mannerisms.
b. their names (faces are hard to remember).
c. their faces (names are hard to remember).
3. In class you like to

a. take notes, even if you don’t reread them.
b. listen intently to every word.
c. sit up close and watch the instructor.
A visual learner would answer a, c, and c. An auditory learner would

answer b, b, and b. A kinesthetic learner would answer c, a, and a.
Visual learners like to read and are often good spellers. When visual
learners study, they often benefit from graphic organizers such as charts and
graphs. Flashcards often appeal to them and help them learn, especially if
they use colored markers, which will help them form images in their minds
as they learn words or concepts.
Auditory learners, by contrast, like oral directions and may find written
materials confusing or boring. They often talk to themselves and may even
whisper aloud when they read. They also like being read aloud to. Auditory
learners will benefit from saying things aloud as they study and by making
tapes for themselves and listening to them later. Oral repetition is also an
important study tool. Making up rhymes or other oral mnemonic devices
will also help them study, and they may like to listen to music as they work.
Kinesthetic learners like to stay on the move. They often find it difficult
to sit still for a long time and will often tap their feet and gesticulate a lot
while speaking. They tend to learn best by doing rather than observing.
Kinesthetic learners may want to walk around as they practice what they are
learning, because using their bodies helps them remember things. Taking
notes is an important way of reinforcing knowledge for the kinesthetic
learner, as is making flashcards.
It is important to remember that most people learn in a mixture of styles,
although they may have a distinct preference for one style over the others.
Determine which is your dominant style, but be open to strategies for all
types of learners.
◗ Remember—Don’t Memorize
You need to use study methods that go beyond rote memorization to gen-
uine comprehension in order to be fully prepared for your test. Using study
methods that suit your learning style will help you to really learn the mate-
rial you need to know for the test. One of the most important learning
strategies is to be an active reader. Interact with what you are reading by
STU DY S K I LLS 11
asking questions, making notes, and marking passages instead of simply

reading the words on the page. Choose methods of interacting with the text
that match your dominant learning style.
• Ask questions. When you read a lesson, ask questions such as,
“What is the main idea of this section?” Asking yourself questions
will test your comprehension of the material. You are also putting
the information into your own words, which will help you remem-
ber what you have learned. This can be especially helpful when you
are learning math techniques. Putting concepts into your own
words helps you to understand these processes more clearly.
• Make notes. Making notes as you read is another way for you to
identify key concepts and to put the material into your own words.
Writing down important ideas and mathematical formulas can also
help you memorize them.
• Highlight. Using a highlighter is another way to interact with what
you are reading. Be sure you are not just coloring, but highlighting
key concepts that you can return to when you review.
• Read aloud. Especially for the auditory learner, reading aloud can
help aid in comprehension. Hearing mathematical information and
formulas read aloud can clarify their meanings for you.
• Make connections. Try to relate what you are reading to things
you already know or to a real-world example. It might be helpful,
for example, to make up a word problem, or draw a diagram or
table, to clarify your understanding of what a problem is asking you
to do.
Reading actively is probably the most important way to use your study
time effectively. If you spend an hour passively reading and retaining little
of what you have read, you have wasted that hour. If you take an hour and
a half to actively read the same information, that is time well spent. How-
ever, you will not only be learning new material; you will also need meth-
ods to review what you have learned:
• Flashcards. Just making the cards alone is a way of engaging with

the material. You have to identify key concepts, words, or important
information and write them down. Then, when you have made a
stack of cards, you have a portable review system. Flashcards are
perfect for studying with a friend and for studying on the go.
• Mnemonics. These catchy rhymes, songs, and acronyms are tools
that help us remember information. Some familiar mnemonics are
“i before e except after c” or ROY G. BIV, which stands for Red
Orange Yellow Green Blue Indigo Violet—the colors of the rain-
bow. Developing your own mnemonics will help you make a per-
sonal connection with the material and help you recall it during
your test. Mnemonics are also useful when you personalize your
“cheat sheet.”
• Personalized cheat sheet. Of course, you aren’t really going to
cheat, but take the Formula Cheat Sheet found on pages ix–x and
add to it. Or, highlight the formulas you really need and don’t yet
know well. This will help them to stand out more than the ones you
already know. You can then use the sheet to review—it’s perfect for
studying on the go.
• Outlines and Maps. If you have pages of notes from your active
reading, you can create an outline or map of your notes to review.
Both tools help you organize and synthesize the material. Most stu-
dents are familiar with creating outlines using hierarchical headings,
but maps may be less familiar. To make a map, write down the main
point, idea, or topic under consideration in the middle of a clean
piece of paper. Draw a circle around this main topic. Next, draw
branches out from that center circle on which to record subtopics
and details. Create as many branches as you need—or as many as
will fit on your sheet of paper.
◗ Studying with Others

Studying in a group or with another person can be a great motivator. It can
also be a distraction, as it can be easy to wander off the subject at hand and
on to more interesting subjects such as last night’s game, or some juicy gos-
sip. The key is to choose your study partners well and to have a plan for the
study session that will keep you on track.
There are definite advantages to studying with others:
• Motivation. If you commit to working with someone else, you are

more likely to follow through. Also, you may be motivated by some
friendly competition.
• Solidarity. You can draw encouragement from your fellow test-takers
and you won’t feel alone in your efforts. This companionship can
help reduce test anxiety.
• Shared expertise. As you learned from your practice questions,
you have certain strengths and weaknesses in the subject. If you can
find a study partner with the opposite strengths and weaknesses,
you can each benefit from your partner’s strengths. Not only will
you get help, but also you will build your confidence for the upcom-
ing test by offering your expertise.
STU DY S K I LLS 13
There are also some disadvantages to studying with others:
• Stress of competition. Some study partners can be overly com-

petitive, always trying to prove that they are better in the subject
than you. This can lead to stress and sap your confidence. Be wary
of the overly competitive study partner.
• Too much fun. If you usually hate studying, but really look for-
ward to getting together with your best friend to study, it may be
because you spend more time socializing than studying. Sometimes
it is better to study with an acquaintance who is well-matched with
your study needs and with whom you are more likely to stay on task.
• Time and convenience. Organizing a study group can take time.
If you are spending a lot of time making phone calls and sending e-
mails trying to get your study group together, or if you have to
travel a distance to meet up with your study partner, this may not
be an efficient strategy.
Weigh the pros and cons of studying with others to decide if this is a
good strategy for you.
JUST THE FACTS . . . JUST IN TIME
You have thought about the what, where, when, and how; now you need to
put all four factors together to build your study plan. Your study plan should
be as detailed and specific as possible. When you have created your study
plan, you then need to follow through.
◗ Building a Study Plan

You will need a daily planner, a calendar with space to write, or a personal
digital assistant to build your plan. You have already determined the time
you have free for study. Now, you need to fill in the details. You have also
figured out what you need to study, and have broken the material down into
smaller chunks. Assign one chunk of material to each of the longer study
sessions you have planned. You may need to combine some chunks or add
some review sessions depending on the number of long study sessions you
have planned in your schedule.
You can also plan how to study in your schedule. For example, you might
write for Monday 6:00 P.M. to 9:00 P.M.: Read Chapter 4, make notes, map
notes, and create set of flashcards. Then for Tuesday 8:30 A.M. to 9:00 A.M.
(your commute time): study Chapter 4 flashcards. The key to a successful
study plan is to be as detailed as possible.
◗ Staying on Track
Bear in mind that nothing goes exactly as planned. You may need to stay late
at work, you may get a nasty cold, soccer practice may go late, or your child
might need to go to the doctor: any number of things can happen to your
well-thought-out study plan—and some of them probably will. You will
need strategies for coping with life’s little surprises.
The most important thing to remember when you get off track is not to
panic or throw in the towel. You can adjust your schedule to make up the
lost time. You may need to reconsider some of your other commitments and
see if you can borrow some time for studying. Or, you may need to forgo
one of your planned review sessions to learn new material. You can always
find a few extra minutes here and there for your review.
◗ Minimizing Distractions
There are some distractions, such as getting sick, that are unavoidable.
Many others can be minimized. There are the obvious distractions such as
socializing, television, and the telephone. There are also less amusing dis-
tractions such as anxiety and fear. They can all eat up your time and throw
off your study plan. The good news is you can do a lot to keep these dis-
tractions at bay.
• Enlist the help of your friends and family. Just as you have asked
your friends and family to respect your study space, you can also ask
them to respect your study time. Make sure they know how impor-
tant this test is to you. They will then understand that you don’t
want to be disturbed during study time, and will do what they can
to help you stick to your plan.
• Keep the television off. If you know that you have the tendency
to get pulled into watching TV, don’t turn it on even before you plan
to study. This way you won’t be tempted to push back your study
time to see how a program ends or see what’s coming up next.
• Turn off your cell phone and the ringer on your home phone.
This way you won’t eat up your study time answering phone calls—
even a five-minute call can cause you to lose focus and waste pre-
cious time.
• Use the relaxation techniques discussed earlier in the chapter
if you find yourself becoming anxious while you study. Breathe,
tense and relax your muscles, or visualize a soothing place.
• Banish negative thoughts. Negative thoughts—such as, “I’ll never
get through what I planned to study tonight,” “I’m so mad all my
friends are at the movies and I’m stuck here studying,” “Maybe I’ll
just study for an hour instead of two so I can watch the season finale
STU DY S K I LLS 15
of my favorite show”—interfere with your ability to study effec-

tively. Sometimes just noticing your negative thoughts is enough to
conquer them. Simply answer your negative thought with some-
thing positive—“If I study the full two hours, I can watch the tape
of my show,” “I want to study because I want to do well on the test
so I can . . .” and so on.
◗ Staying Motivated
You can also get off track because your motivation wanes. You may have
built a rock-solid study plan and set aside every evening from 6:00 to 9:00
to study. And then your favorite team makes it to the playoffs. Your study
plan suddenly clashes with a very compelling distraction. Or, you may sim-
ply be tired from a long day at work or school or from taking care of your
family and feel like you don’t have the energy for three hours of concen-
trated study. Here are some strategies to help keep you motivated:
• Visualization. Remind yourself of what you will gain from doing

well on the test. Take some time to visualize how your life will be
positively changed if you accomplish your goal. Do not, however,
spend time visualizing how awful your life will be if you fail. Posi-
tive visualization is a much more powerful motivator than negative
imagery.
• Rewards. Rewards for staying on track can be a great motivator,
especially for flagging enthusiasm. When you accomplish your
study goal, perhaps watch your favorite TV program or have a spe-
cial treat—whatever it is that will motivate you.
• Positive feedback. You can use your study plan to provide positive
feedback. As you work toward the test date, look back at your plan
and remind yourself of how much you have already accomplished.
Your plan will provide a record of your steady progress as you move
forward. You can also enlist the help of study partners, family, and
friends to help you stay motivated. Let the people in your life know
about your study plan and your progress. They are sure to applaud
your efforts.
At the end of the day, you will be your prime motivator. The fact that you
bought this book and have taken the time to create a well-thought-out study
plan shows that you are committed to your goal. Now, all that is left is to
go for it! Imagine yourself succeeding on your test and let the excitement
of meeting your goal carry you forward.
2
Building Blocks of
Geometry: Points, Lines,
and Angles
T he study of geometry begins with an understanding of the basic
building blocks: points, lines, segments, rays, and angles. All geo-
metric figures are a result of these simple figures. Begin reviewing geom-
etry by taking this ten-question benchmark quiz. These questions are
similar to the type of questions that you will find on important tests.
When you are finished, check the answer key carefully to assess your
results. Use this quiz to determine how much of your study time should
be devoted to this chapter.
16
B U I LD I N G B LO C KS O F G E O M ETRY 17
BENCHMARK QUIZ
Use the drawing below to answer questions 1 through 4.

C G
F
B
H
D
A E
1. Which set of points is NOT coplanar?

a. A, E, F, and B
b. A, B, C, and D
c. A, B, C, and E
d. A, E, H, and D
e. All the sets above are coplanar.
2. Which lines are skew lines?

a.
BF and
DH

b. EH and
HG
c.
AB and
GH
and EH
d. BF

e. EF and
AB
3. Which lines are NOT parallel?

and AB
a. CD

b. GH and
AB
c.
AE and
AB
d.
CG and
AE
and DH
e. BF
4. Which lines are perpendicular?

a.
AB and
FE
and AB
b. FG

c. DH and
HG
d.
HE and
CB
e.
GH and
AB
is 28 inches, the measure of

5. If the measure of AC AB is 2x + 4, and
, what is the value of x?
point B is the midpoint of AC
a. 5 inches
b. 12 inches
c. 14 inches
d. 7 inches
e. 3.5 inches
6. If the measure of ∠WYZ = 35° and

YW bisects ∠XYZ, what is the
measure of ∠XYW?
a. 70°
b. 105°
c. 17.5°
d. 35°
e. 350°
7. If
YZ is the perpendicular bisector of
AB, and the segments intersect
at point W, which of the following would ALWAYS be true?
a. The measure of AW is one-half the measure of
WB.
b. ∠AWZ is 90°.
c. ∠AWY is acute.
d. The measure of
YW is one half the measure of YZ .
e. The sum of ∠AWY and ∠BWY is 90°.
8. Given the figure below, which of the following is true?
is perpendicular to
a. AB AD.
b.
BD is parallel to
BC.
c. Points A, B, C, and D are collinear.
d. The sum of the measure of ∠ABD and ∠CBD add up to 90°.
e. The sum of the measure of ∠ABD and ∠CBD add up to 180°.
9. Which is the classification of the angle?
a. right acute
b. right
c. obtuse
d. right obtuse
e. acute
is perpendicular to line
10. Given that the lines l and m are parallel, AC

l, and BD is perpendicular to line l, which statement or statements are
FALSE?
a. ∠ACD is congruent to ∠BCD.

b. The measure of
AC is equal to the measure of
BD.
c. ∠BDC is 90°.
d. ∠ACD is 90°.
is perpendicular to line m.
e. BD
BENCHMARK QUIZ SOLUTIONS
How did you do on the subject of the basic building blocks of geometry?
Check your answers here, and then analyze your results to figure out your
plan of attack to master these topics.
1. c. Answer choices a, b, and d are coplanar points. Choice c, points

A, B, C, and E, are NOT coplanar. Points A, E, C, and G lie on a
plane that cuts through the solid on a diagonal. Points A, B, C,
and D lie on the plane that is a side of the solid. Points A, E, H,
and D lie on a plane that is the base of the solid.
2. d. Skew lines are two non-parallel lines in different planes that do

not intersect.
BF and
EH are not contained in the same plane, so
they are not parallel and will never intersect. All the other line
pairs are either parallel in the same plane, or intersect in the same
plane. Some of the pairs are in planes that are diagonal through
the solid, and some pairs are in planes that are sides of the solid.
3. c.
AE and AB intersect, and are actually perpendicular lines. Parallel
lines do not intersect, and lie in the same plane. All of the other pairs
of lines are parallel in a plane. Some of the pairs are in planes that
are diagonal through the solid, and some pairs are in planes that are
sides of the solid.
4. c. Perpendicular lines form a right angle. Although the angle does

not look like a right angle, it is 90°, as it forms the bottom right
angle of the rectangular solid, and it is labeled with the small
square in the angle to indicate 90°. All of the other pair choices
are either parallel or skew lines.
5. a. Since no picture is given, sketch the segment:
Given the information and the figure, set up an equation to solve

for x. Since B is the midpoint, the measure of
AB plus the measure

of BC equals 28. The equation is:
2x + 4 + 2x + 4 = 28
4x + 8 = 28 Combine like terms.
4x + 8 – 8 = 28 – 8 Subtract 8 from both sides.
4x 20
= Combine like terms, and divide
4 4
both sides by 4.
x = 5 inches
6. d. Since
YW bisects ∠XYZ, the measure of ∠XYW is equal to the
measure of ∠WYZ, which is given as 35°.
7. b. Since no picture is given, sketch the segments:
Perpendicular segments form 90° angles and ∠AWZ is formed by

the perpendicular segments. Note that for choice d, it is never
stated that , so you cannot assume that it bisects.
AB intersects YZ
8. e. The angles form a straight line, and all straight lines form a
straight angle, which is equal to 180°.
9. b. The angle is a right angle, as indicated by the small square in the

interior of the angle.
10. a. ∠ACD is NOT congruent to ∠BCD. Remember that the middle

letter is the vertex of the angle. ∠ACD is a right angle, formed by
the perpendicular line and segment. ∠BCD is an acute angle. It is
not shown in the figure, but it is definitely less than 90°. Draw in
the angle with a dotted line as shown:
BENCHMARK QUIZ RESULTS
If you answered 8–10 questions correctly, you have a good grasp of the basic
building blocks of geometry. Read over the chapter, concentrating on the
areas where you were weak. Then, proceed to the quiz at the end of this
chapter for additional confirmation of your success.
If you answered 4–7 questions correctly, you need to refresh yourself on
these topics. Carefully read through the lesson in this chapter for review
and skill building. Pay attention to the sidebars that refer you to more in-
depth practice, hints, and shortcuts. Work through the quiz at the end of
the chapter to check your progress.
If you answered 1–3 questions correctly, you need help and clarification
on the topics in this section. First, carefully read this chapter and concen-
trate on the sidebars and visual aids that will help with comprehension. Per-
haps you learned this information and forgot; take the time now to refresh
your skills and improve your knowledge. Go to the suggested website in the
Extra Help sidebar in this chapter, and do extended practice. You may also
want to refer to Geometry Success in 20 Minutes a Day, Lessons 1, 2, 3, and
4, published by LearningExpress.
JUST IN TIME LESSON—BASIC BUILDING BLOCKS

OF GEOMETRY
Topics in this chapter include:
• Geometry Vocabulary: Point, Line, and Plane

• Types of Points
• Geometry Vocabulary: Ray and Segment
• Types of Lines and Planes
• Angles and Angle Classification
• Geometry Vocabulary: Congruent Figures, Midpoint, and Bisector
• Using Algebra to Solve Geometric Problems
• Perpendicular Lines and Perpendicular Bisectors
GEOMETRY VOCABULARY—POINT, LINE,

AND PLANE
All of geometry starts with three basic constructs.
GLOSSARY
POINT a position in space. A point has no length, width, or height.
LINE an infinite collection of points that has length, but no width or thickness
PLANE an infinite collection of points that has length, and width but no thickness
A point can be pictured by a dot and is labeled with a capital letter.

Lines in geometry are straight lines unless otherwise described. Any two
points determine exactly one unique line. Two points on the line, in either
or BA
order, name a line. The following graphic is a picture of AB .
There can be many names for a line. If we label another point on the
line, the line on the following graphic can be labeled
AB, , AC
BA, CA ,

CB, or BC.
A line, as indicated by the arrows on each end, extends forever in either

direction.
A plane is a flat surface. It can be envisioned as a sheet of paper that
extends in all four directions forever. Any three non-collinear points deter-
mine a plane. Any three non-collinear points on its surface name a plane.
TYPES OF POINTS
GLOSSARY
COLLINEAR POINTS three or more points that lie on the same line
NON-COLLINEAR POINTS three or more points that do not lie on the same line
Example:
Points A, B, and C are collinear. Points B, C, and D are non-collinear.

GEOMETRY VOCABULARY: RAY AND SEGMENT
GLOSSARY
RAY an endpoint P on a line and all the points on the line that lie on one side of P.
There are an infinite number of points on a ray.
Rays are named with the endpoint and another point on the ray. The end-
point is always listed first. The following is a picture of
XY with endpoint X.
Note that when naming a ray, the endpoint must be named first. In the
same figure, there is a line,
XY. It is made up of two different rays.
XY is dif-
ferent than YX. If we label another point on
XY, as shown in the following
figure, we can name the same ray, that is XY, with another name, XZ.
GLOSSARY
SEGMENT two endpoints, such as R and T, and all of the points that lie between R and T
with endpoints R and T.

Following is a picture of RT
This segment can be named either RT or TR. A segment has a definite
length that can be measured with a ruler. There are, however, an infinite
number of points on RT. If we add another point, point S, to RT
, we cre-

ate two new distinct segments, RS or SR, and ST or TS.
Example:
Given the figure:
There is: One line, named

AB or
BA,
AC or
CA,
BC or
CB
Collinear points A, B, and C
Non-collinear points A, B, and D
Four segments, named AB or
BA,
BC or
CB,
AC or
CA,
BD or
DB

Five rays, named BA or BC, BD, AB or AC, CB, or CA
SHORTCUT
" Remember that all lines, segments, rays, and planes have an infinite
number of points. There may be only a few points named, but there
exists an infinite number of points on these figures.
TYPES OF LINES AND PLANES
GLOSSARY
PARALLEL LINES lines in the same plane that do not intersect
The following is a picture of parallel lines. Often, arrowheads are shown on

a pair of parallel lines.
Parallel is denoted by the symbol so in the preceding figure, AB

CD
and
PQ
RS. Segments and rays can also be parallel. Likewise, there are par-
allel planes. When two distinct parallel planes are pictured, the third
dimension is introduced, and it becomes more difficult to envision and
depict on a page.
In the rectangular solid above, there are several pairs of parallel planes,
namely the top and bottom, the left and right, and the front and back planes.
RULE BOOK
E Any two distinct lines in the same plane are either parallel or inter-
secting. If they intersect (meet), they meet in exactly one point.
Two distinct planes can be parallel or intersecting. If they intersect,
they meet in exactly one line:
GLOSSARY
SKEW LINES two non-parallel lines that do not intersect. These two lines are not in
the same plane.
Skew lines are envisioned in three dimensions. Segments and rays can
and NM
also be skew. In the following figure, HI , , and also
HK and JN NO
are examples of pairs of segments that are skew.
and IM
ANGLES AND ANGLE CLASSIFICATION
GLOSSARY
ANGLE a geometric figure formed by two rays with the same endpoint
Angles are also formed by intersecting lines, and by two segments, with one
of the endpoints the same. In an angle, the common endpoint is called the
vertex and the rays, or segments, are called the sides. The following is a pic-
ture of ∠QRS, with vertex R and sides RQ and RS.
If there is no other angle at vertex R, the angle can be named ∠R. Other-
wise, all three points must be named, with the vertex point named in the mid-
dle, such as ∠QRS or ∠SRQ. Sometimes the interior is labeled with a number
to make reference to the angle easier, as shown in the following picture.
RULE BOOK
E When naming an angle with three points, the vertex point MUST be the
middle point listed. For example:
The angle labeled 1 is CDE or EDC, but 2 is CED or DEC.

Notice that the same points, C, D, and E, together with the segments
and rays shown, create several distinct angles.
An angle has a definite size, measured by a protractor. Angle size can be

envisioned as a vertex and one side of the angle on a line, and the circular
distance to reach the other side determines the measure. The units of angle
measured are called degrees.
In the figure, the solid curved arrow shows the measure of ∠BAC,
denoted by m∠BAC. The dotted curved arrow shows the m∠BAD. The
m∠BAD, which is the straight line
DB, has a measure of 180°. Degrees are
denoted by the ° symbol.
SHORTCUT
" If there is a figure where two angles together form a straight line, the
sum of their measure is 180°.
RULE BOOK
E Angles are classified according to their measure:
ACUTE ANGLES are angles that measure greater than 0° and less than 90°.
RIGHT ANGLES are angles that measure 90°.
OBTUSE ANGLES are angles that measure greater than 90° and less
than 180°.
STRAIGHT ANGLES are angles that measure 180°.
REFLEX ANGLES are angles that measure greater than 180°.
Example:
What is the classification of the following angle?
The above angle is exactly 90°. The classification is a right angle.
Example:
What is the classification of the following angle?
This angle is greater than 90° and less than 180°, so the classifica-
tion is obtuse.
SHORTCUT
" If there is a figure of an angle with the small box drawn in the interior,
then the angle measure is 90°, and the angle is a right angle. If there
is a figure where two angles together form an angle with the small box
in the interior, the sum of their measures is 90°.
GEOMETRY VOCABULARY—CONGRUENT
FIGURES, MIDPOINT, AND BISECTOR
GLOSSARY
CONGRUENT FIGURES have the same size and shape. Any segments or angles with
the same size are congruent. The symbol for congruent is .
Example:
Congruent segments are marked with slashes and congruent angles are marked with
arcs.
MIDPOINT of a segment is a point, such as Q, that divides a segment into two con-
gruent segments
Example:
In this example, Q is the midpoint of

PR, therefore PQ QR.
BISECTOR a line, segment, or ray that divides a figure into two congruent figures.
Example:
In this example, , since AB

XY bisects AC BC
.
Example:
bisects ABD and mABD = 50°, then mABC = mCBD and each angle
If BC
measures 25°.
USING ALGEBRA TO SOLVE

GEOMETRIC PROBLEMS
Often, algebra is combined with the concepts of midpoint and bisector to

solve problems.
Example:
Given the figure below, if the measure of
XZ = 42 inches and Y is
, what is the value of x?
the midpoint of XZ
To solve this, remember that the two smaller segments are congruent
since point Y is the midpoint.
6x + 3 + 6x + 3 = 42 Set up an equation to solve the problem.

12x + 6 – 6 = 42 – 6 Subtract 6 from both sides of the equation.
12x 36
= 12 Combine like terms, and divide both sides
12
by 12.
x = 3 inches
Example:
Given the figure below, if
BD bisects ∠ABC, m∠CBD = 67.5°, and
∠CBA = 12x + 15, what is the value of x?
bisects ∠ABC.
∠CBD is one half the measure of ∠CBA since BD
Therefore, the measure of ∠ABC = 2 67.5, which is equal to 135°.
12x + 15 = 135 Set up an equation.

12x + 15 – 15 = 135 – 15 Subtract 15 from both sides of the
equation.
12x 120
= 1 Combine like terms, and divide both
12 2
sides by 12.
x = 10
Be careful when using algebra to solve a problem. Read carefully and

understand whether the problem requires you to find the value of the vari-
able, or the actual value of the measure of an angle or segment. If the meas-
ure of an angle or segment is required, first solve for the variable and then
use this value to solve for the measure. In the last example, if the problem
had asked for the measure of ∠CBA, you would substitute 10 for the vari-
able x, to get 12x + 15 = 12 10 + 15 = 120 + 15 = 135.
PERPENDICULAR LINES
AND PERPENDICULAR BISECTOR
GLOSSARY
PERPENDICULAR LINES are distinct intersecting lines that form four congruent
angles, each of 90°. The symbol for perpendicular is .
PERPENDICULAR BISECTOR of a segment, is a segment, line, or ray that is per-

pendicular to the segment and also divides the segment into two congruent segments
is a perpendicular bisector of segment

In the following figure, the line VZ

WY. So, by definition, ∠WXV ≅ ∠VXY ≅ ∠YXZ ≅ ∠ZXW and each has a
measure of 90°. Notice that a small box is used to indicate perpendicular
figures. This small box in the interior of any angle will indicate a 90° angle.
Recall that the measure of ∠YXW = 180° by definition; it forms a straight
line. Since ∠VXY ≅ ∠WXV, then their measures are equal. Together they
measure 180°, so the measure of each separate angle is 90°. Segments and
rays can also be perpendicular.
RULE BOOK
E If there are two parallel lines and a segment perpendicular to one of

the lines, then the segment is also perpendicular to the other line. If
there are two lines that are parallel, any perpendicular segments in
between these lines, with endpoints on the lines, are congruent; they
have the same measure.
Example:
TIPS AND STRATEGIES
When working with the basic geometric figures, remember:
• Know the geometry vocabulary, as outlined under Glossary.

• Lines, planes, segments, and rays have an infinite number of points.
• Segments and angles can be measured.
• Any two lines in the same plane either intersect, or they are parallel.
• Two lines in the same plane that intersect meet at a single point.
• Two planes that intersect meet in a straight line.
• Skew lines are non-intersecting, are not in the same plane, and are
not parallel.
• When naming an angle, the vertex point must be named in the
middle.
• Angles are classified by their measure.
• A perpendicular bisector of a segment divides the segment into two
congruent segments, and forms right angles.
When you are taking a multiple-choice test, remember this tip to

improve your score:
• When using algebra to solve a geometry problem, be sure what the

problem is asking you to find. Sometimes, the value of the variable
is wanted, and other times the measure of a segment or angle is
wanted.
EXTRA HELP
O For further instruction and clarification on the basic geometric figures,
visit the website www.math.com. On the left sidebar, click on Geome-
try. There is a series of interactive lessons, followed by a short inter-
active quiz. Another website is http://library.thinkquest.org/2609/.
Click to enter the site, and then click on Start the Lessons! to take the
quiz. You may also want to reference the book Geometry Success in 20
Minutes a Day, published by LearningExpress.
PRACTICE QUIZ
Following is additional practice on the basic geometric figures. Check to see

if you have mastered these concepts.
Use this figure for questions 1 through 6.
1. Which of the following statements is FALSE?

a. Points R and Z lie on a line.
b. Points Q, P, and R are collinear.
c. Points R, W, and Z are collinear.
d. Points Z, Y, and X are non-collinear.
e. Points T, S, and W are non-collinear.
2. Which of the following statements is true?

a. Points W, X, and S are coplanar.
b. The intersection of plane WZY and plane TZY is point Z.
c. Plane TQW is parallel to plane RXY.
d. choice a and c only
e. Choices a, b, and c are all true.
3. Which pair of lines are skew lines?

a.
QT and
RS

b. WX and
SY
and SY
c. TS
d.
PW and
RX
e. None of the above are skew lines.
4. Which pair of lines is parallel?

a.
QP and
WX
and SY
b. QW

c. QW and TZ
d. choices a and b only
e. All of the above pairs are parallel lines.
5. Which of the following statements is true?

a. ∠WZT measures 90°.
b. ∠ZYS is acute.
c. ∠WZT is right acute.
d. choices a and c only
e. choices a, b, and c
6. Which of the following sets of points is coplanar?

a. points T, Z, R, and X
b. points Q, R, S, and Z
c. points W, X, Y, and Z
e. choices a, b, and c
7. Given the figure below and the fact that

XY
AB, which of the fol-
lowing statements is ALWAYS true?
a.
AB
BY
b. The measure of
BY is equal to the measure of
XA.
c. ∠XYB ≅ ∠BAY

d. AX XY
e. None of the above is always true.
8. What is the classification of the following angle?
a. straight obtuse
b. obtuse
c. right obtuse
d. acute
e. right acute
9. Given the following three angles, which of the following statements

is true?
a. ∠DEF is the bisector of ∠GHI.

b. All of the angles are congruent.
c. ∠ABC is an acute right angle.
d. ∠ABC ≅ ∠DEF
e. All of the above statements are true.
10. Given the figure below and that

CE EF
DF, CD
CE, DF, which
of the following statements is true?
a.
CD ≅ EF
b. ∠CDF is a right angle.

c. EF DF
d. All of the above are true.
e. None of the above is true.
CE
11. If CD , which of the following statements is true?
a. Points C, D, and E are collinear.
b. ∠CED is a right angle.
c. ∠DCE is a right obtuse angle.
12. Given the following figure, which of the statements is true?
a.
TR, together with
TU, form a 100° angle.
b.
RS and
SR name the exact same set of points.
c. There are exactly four points on
RU.
d. There are exactly three points on
TR.
e.
TS and
TR name the exact same set of points.
.
a. You can measure the length of line AB

b. AB contains the same points as AC.
c. There are an infinite number of points on
AB.
d. choices b and c only
e. choices a and c only
has a definite length.

a. XY
b. There are exactly two points on
XY.

c. XY is the same as XY.
e. choices a and b only
a. The measure of ∠CAD is twice the measure of ∠BAD.

b. ∠BAC ≅ ∠CAD
c. The measure of ∠BAD is one half the measure of ∠BAC.
e. choices a and b only
, the length of CM

16. Given that M is the midpoint of CD = 3x + 7, and

the length of CD = 32 cm, what is the value of x?
a. 3 cm
1
b. 82 cm
1
c. 46 cm
2
d. 73 cm
e. 6 cm
17.
RS bisects ∠QRT, the measure of ∠QRS = 5x + 35, and the measure
of ∠TRS = 10x + 15. What is the measure of ∠QRT ?
a. 55°
b. 4°
c. 110°
d. (5x + 20)°
e. (5x – 20)°
bisects PQ
18. ST , they intersect at point R, and the measure of
ST = 12
= 4x + 4, what is the value of x?
mm. If PR = 6x and RQ
a. 3.2 mm
b. 1 mm
c. 2 mm
d. 4.2 mm
e. 18 mm
19. In the figure below, if

AC = 31 cm, what is the value of x?
29
a. 4 cm
b. 6 cm
c. 3 cm
d. 15.5 cm
31
e. 3 cm
20. If the measure of ∠LMN = 85°, and

MQ bisects ∠LMN, which of the
following is true?
a. measure of ∠LMQ = 85°
b. measure of ∠QMN = 85°
c. measure of ∠LMQ = 42.5°
d. measure of ∠LMQ = 170°
e. None of the above statements is true.
21. and they meet at point E. The measure of

CD bisects AB AE = 6x +
= 4x + 17 inches. What is the length
3 inches, and the measure of EB
of
AB?
a. 7 inches
b. 45 inches
c. 90 inches
d. 22.5 inches
e. 14 inches
22. If the measure of

CD = 7 inches and point A is the midpoint of
CD,
?
what is the measure of CA
a. 7 inches
b. 14 inches
c. 3.5 inches
d. 42 inches
e. 21 inches
23. ∠FGJ is bisected by

GH, and the measure of ∠FGJ = 150°. If the
measure of ∠FGH = (2x + 8)°, what is the measure of ∠HGJ?
a. 33.5°
b. 75°
c. 79°
d. 67°
e. 35.5°
= 3x + 7 meters, and the

24. In the following figure, the measure of WX
measure of XY = 5x – 5 meters. Point X is the midpoint of
WY. What

is the length of WY?
a. 50 m
17
b. 7 m
c. 25 m
d. 12.5 m
19
e. 6 m
bisects ∠WXZ. What is the measure of

25. In the following figure, XY
∠WXY?
a. 11°
b. 35°
c. 55°
d. 70°
e. 17.5°
ANSWERS
Following are the answers and explanations to the practice quiz. Read them
over carefully for any problems that you answered incorrectly.
1. c. Points R, W, and Z are not collinear. Statement c is false. All of

the other statements about the figure are true.
2. d. Only statements a and c are true. Choice a is true—points W, X,

and S are coplanar, since any three points define a plane. Choice c
is true—the two planes listed are parallel, as they are the front and
back sides of the rectangular solid. Choice b is false—when two
planes intersect, they intersect in a line, not in a point.
and SY
3. b. WX are skew lines. They are two lines that neither inter-
sect nor are parallel. They do not lie in the same plane.
4. e. All of the choices listed are parallel line pairs. In all cases, they are
a pair of lines in the same plane that do not intersect.
5. a. ∠WZT measures 90°, as indicated by the small box in the interior

of the angle. Note that choice b is incorrect. Even though the
angle appears to be acute, the small box in the interior of the
angle indicates that it is a right angle.
6. d. Both choice a and choice c show sets of coplanar points. Choice c

is the plane that is a side of the solid. Choice a is a plane that runs
diagonally through the solid.
7. a. The only statement that is true is that the named segment and

line are perpendicular. AB BY, as shown in the figure by the
small box in the interior of ∠YBA.
8. b. The angle measures less than 180° and measures more than 90°.
This classification is obtuse.
9. d. The only statement that is true is that ∠ABC is congruent to ∠DEF.

Choice a is incorrect, because a ray, not an angle, bisects an angle.
10. d. The three statements are all true given the facts, and the figure
drawn.
11. e. None of the statements is true. In order to evaluate these state-

ments, draw the perpendicular rays with endpoint C. This is the
vertex of the angle.
From the figure, it is clear that none of the three statements is true.
Note that ∠CED is an acute angle, since the vertex is E, not C. This
can be seen if you draw in the side of the angle on the figure:
and
12. e. TS TR name the exact same set of points since they are just
two names for the same ray. They both have an infinite number of
points, with endpoint T and in the direction of both S and R.
13. d. Statements b and c are both true. Statement a is false—you cannot

measure the length of a line, it has an infinite length. Statement b
is true—these are two names for the same line. Statement c is
true—all lines have an infinite number of points.
14. a. All segments have a definite length, even though they contain an
infinite number of points.
15. b. The two angles are congruent since they have the same measure.
16. a. In order to solve this problem, it is helpful to draw the segment

with the given information included.
Since M is the midpoint of the segment, each half of the segment

is represented by 3x + 7, for a total length of 32 cm.
3x + 7 + 3x + 7 = 32 Set up the equation.
6x 18
6
sides by 6.
x = 3 cm
17. c. Draw a picture to help visualize the problem.
bisects ∠QRT, ∠QRS and ∠TRS are con-

Since it is stated that RS
gruent, and so have the same measure. First, find the value of x, and
then use that value to calculate the value of the angle.
5x + 35 = 10x + 15 Set up an equation.

5x – 5x + 35 = 10x – 5x + 15 Subtract 5x from both sides.
35 = 5x + 15 Combine like terms.
35 – 15 = 5x + 15 – 15 Subtract 15 from both sides.
20 5x
5 5
both sides by 5.
4=x
Using the value of 4 for x, substitute in to find the measure of
∠QRS: 5(4) + 35 = 20 + 35 = 55°. This is one half of the measure
of ∠QRT. The measure of ∠QRT = 2(55) = 110°.
18. c. Draw the figure to help solve the problem.
= 12 mm does not help with the solution. Use

The fact that ST
algebra.
6x = 4x + 4 Set up an equation.
6x – 4x = 4x – 4x + 4 Subtract 4x from both sides.
2x 4
2
sides by 2.
x=2
= 31
19. b. The two segments together combine to make segment AC
cm. Use algebra.
2x + 1 + 3x = 31 Set up an equation.
5x 30
5
sides by 5.
x = 6 cm
20. c. Draw the angle with bisector. ∠LMQ is half the measure of
∠LMN.
21. c. Draw the figure to help with the solution.
≅
AE EB, since E is the midpoint. Use algebra to solve for x, and
then find the length of
AB.
6x + 3 = 4x + 17 Set up the equation.
2x 14
2
sides by 2.
x=7
Now, substitute x = 7 to find the length of
AB = (6 7 + 3) +
(4 7 + 17) = 45 + 45 = 90 inches.
, then the measure of CA

22. c. If A is the midpoint of CD is half the

measure of CD.
23. b. Make a sketch of the figure to help solve the problem.
∠HGJ is half the measure of ∠FGJ, since it is bisected by

GH. The
fact that ∠FGH = (2x + 8)° is not needed to solve the problem.
24. a. Since X is the midpoint, the two segments have the same length.
.
Use algebra to solve for x, and then find the length of WY
3x + 7 = 5x – 5 Set up the equation.
3x – 3x + 7 = 5x – 3x – 5 Subtract 3x from both sides.
7 = 2x – 5 Combine like terms.
7 + 5 = 2x – 5 + 5 Add 5 to both sides.
12 2x
2
sides by 2.
6=x
Now, WY = 3x + 7 + 5x – 5 = 8x + 2, by combining like terms. Sub-
stitute in 6 for x, to get the length: 8 6 + 2 = 48 + 2 = 50 meters.
25. b. ∠WXY ≅ ∠YXZ, so the measures are equal. Use algebra to solve
for n, and then calculate the measure of ∠WXY.
2n + 13 = 5n – 20 Set up the equation.
2n – 2n + 13 = 5n – 2n – 20 Subtract 2n from both sides.
13 = 3n – 20 Combine like terms.
13 + 20 = 3n – 20 + 20 Add 20 to both sides.
33 3n
3
sides by 3.
11 = n
Now, ∠WXY = 5n – 20, so substitute in 11 for n to get:
5 11 – 20 = 55 – 20 = 35°.
3
Special Angle Pairs
and Angle Measurement
F requently, on math tests that assess geometry skills, there are
several special pairs of angles that occur. See how many of these pairs
you remember by taking this ten-question benchmark quiz. Use this quiz
to determine how much of your study time should be devoted to this
chapter.
BENCHMARK QUIZ
1. In the following figure, what is the value of x?
a. 0°
b. 10°
c. 90°
d. 50°
e. 30°
47
2. The following diagram shows parallel lines cut by a transversal. What

is the measure of ∠5?
a. 100°
b. 53°
c. 127°
d. 37°
e. 90°
3. Which angle(s) shown are supplementary to ∠2, in the following par-

allel lines cut by a transversal?
a. ∠6
b. ∠6 and ∠7
c. ∠5
d. ∠8
e. ∠5 and ∠8
S P E C I AL AN G LE PAI R S AN D A N G LE M EAS U R E M E NT 49
4. The following figure shows parallel lines cut by a transversal. What

a. 48°
b. 138°
c. 42°
d. 148°
e. 118°
5. What are the values of the two angles?
a. 28° and 152°

b. 40° and 140°
c. 28° and 62°
d. 40° and 50°
e. 45° and 135°
6. What is the measure of ∠ADB?
a. 90°
b. 50°
c. 40°
d. 130°
e. 45°
7. Which of the statements below is true?
a. The two angles are congruent.

b. The two angles are supplementary.
c. The two angles are vertical.
d. The two angles are complementary.
e. The two angles are obtuse.
8. What is the value of x, given that the lines are parallel lines cut by a
transversal?
a. 20.5°
b. 69.5°
c. 41°
d. 139°
e. 180°
9. Which statement below is ALWAYS true?

a. Both angles of a supplementary pair are acute angles.
b. The angles in a vertical pair are acute.
c. The angles in a complementary pair are congruent.
d. One of the angles in a supplementary pair is obtuse.
e. The angles in a vertical pair are congruent.
10. Using the figure of parallel lines cut by a transversal below, which of
the following statements is false?
a. ∠8 and ∠2 are supplementary.

b. ∠1 and ∠4 are vertical.
c. ∠2 and ∠7 are congruent.
d. ∠5 and ∠1 are supplementary.
e. ∠1 and ∠4 are congruent.
Use the answer key to check your knowledge of special angle pairs. Then,
read the suggestions following the answer explanations to plan your study
of this chapter.
1. b. The two angles marked are a vertical pair, and vertical angles are
congruent. Use algebra:
3x = 30 Set up an equation.
3x 30
= Divide both sides by 3.
3 3
x = 10
2. c. The two marked angles are corresponding angles, and correspon-

ding angles are congruent; they have the same measure.
3. e. ∠2 is an acute angle, thus any angle that is obtuse will be supple-

mentary.
4. b. ∠8 and ∠1 are alternate exterior angles, and are therefore con-

gruent. Because ∠1 forms a linear pair with the angle of 42°, the
measure of ∠1 = 180 – 42 = 138°. The measure of ∠8 = 138°.
5. b. The sum of the measure of these two angles is 180° due to the
straight line they form. Use algebra:
5x + x + 12 = 180 Set up an equation.
6x 168
= 6 Combine like terms, and divide each
6
side by 6.
x = 28 Now, substitute in 28 for x to find the
angle measures.
One angle is 5(28) = 140°; the other angle is 28 + 12 = 40°.
6. c. The two angles shown are adjacent angles that form a right angle.
The measure of ∠ADB = 90 – 50 = 40°.
7. d. Any two angles whose sum of degree-measure equals 90° are

complementary.
8. a. The two marked angles are supplementary. Use algebra:

2x + 139 = 180 Set up the equation.
2x 41
= 2 Combine like terms, and divide
2
both sides by 2.
x = 20.5
9. e. Vertical angles are always congruent. Note that choice d is not

always true; the two angles can both measure 90°.
10. d. ∠1 and ∠5 are not supplementary. These angles are congruent, as

they are corresponding angles.
If you answered 8–10 questions correctly, you have a solid understanding

of angle pairs; you may not need to concentrate your efforts on this topic.
Skim over the chapter, but take your time on the sections in which you need
to be refreshed. It is suggested that you take the quiz at the end of this chap-
ter to make sure that you can handle different problem situations.
If you answered 4–7 questions correctly, you need a more careful review
of these angle pairs. Carefully read through the lessons in this chapter for
review and skill building. Pay attention to the sidebars that refer you to
more in-depth practice, hints, and shortcuts. Work through the quiz at the
end of the chapter to check your progress. Visit the suggested websites for
additional problems.
If you answered 1–3 questions correctly, you need to take time to read
through the entire lesson in this chapter. Concentrate on the sidebars and
visuals that will aid comprehension. Go to the suggested websites in the
Extra Help sidebar in this chapter and do extended practice. You may also
want to refer to Geometry Success in 20 Minutes a Day, Lessons 4 and 5, pub-
lished by LearningExpress.
JUST IN TIME LESSON—SPECIAL ANGLE PAIRS

AND ANGLE MEASUREMENT
• Complementary and Supplementary Angles

• Vertical Angles
• Angle Pairs Formed by Parallel Lines Cut by a Transversal
• Solving Geometry Problems by Using Algebra
Angles were introduced in Chapter 2. In this chapter, the focus will be

on several pairs of special angle relationships that play an important role in
the development of geometry.
COMPLEMENTARY AND SUPPLEMENTARY ANGLES
GLOSSARY
COMPLEMENTARY ANGLES two angles in which the sum of their measures equals 90°
SUPPLEMENTARY ANGLES two angles in which the sum of their measures equals 180°
Complementary and supplementary angles may or may not be next to each

other. The basis of classification for these angles is the sum of their measures.
Examples:
What is the measure of the complement of 23°?
Because an angle and its complement add up to 90°, the measure
of the complement of 23° is 90 – 23 = 67°.
What is the measure of the supplement of 102°?

Because an angle and its supplement add up to 180°, the measure
of the supplement of 102° is 180 – 102 = 78°.
GLOSSARY
ADJACENT ANGLES angles that share a common vertex, a common side and share
no interior points
Example:
LINEAR PAIR a pair of adjacent, supplementary angles
Example:
In the following figure, which of the following is true?
a. ∠CDB and ∠CDE are supplementary.

b. ∠CDB and ∠ADB are a linear pair.
c. ∠ADB and ∠EDB are a linear pair.
d. The sum of the measures of ∠ADB and ∠EDB is 100°.
Choice c is the correct answer. These two angles are supplementary and
adjacent. Choice a is false because the two angles are adjacent but together
do not form a straight line. Choice b is false because the two angles are adja-
cent but are not supplementary. Choice d is false because the sum of these
angles is equal to 180°.
SHORTCUT
" Any two adjacent angles that form a straight line are supplementary.
Any two adjacent angles that form a right angle are complementary. In
the figures above, Figure II shows complementary adjacent angles,
and Figure IV shows supplementary adjacent angles.
VERTICAL ANGLES
When two distinct lines intersect, four angles are formed: ∠1, ∠2, ∠3, and ∠4.
GLOSSARY
VERTICAL ANGLES two non-adjacent angles that are formed by the intersection of
two lines, rays, or segments
In the figure above, the pairs of non-adjacent angles (one pair is angles
1 and 3; the other pair is angles 2 and 4) are called vertical angles.
RULE BOOK
E Vertical angles are congruent.
Example:
In the following diagram, what is the measure of ∠2?
∠1 and the angle marked 139° are supplementary. Their measure

adds to 180°. So the measure of ∠1 = 180 – 139 = 41°. Because ∠2 is
a vertical pair with ∠1, it is also equal to 41°.
Example:
Given the following angles, what is the measure of ∠ABE?
∠ABE is a vertical pair with ∠DBC, whose measure is 137°. So, the
measure of ∠ABE = 137°.
ANGLE PAIRS FORMED BY PARALLEL LINES CUT

BY A TRANSVERSAL
When two parallel lines are given in a figure, there are two main areas: the
interior and the exterior.
When two parallel lines are cut by a third line, the third line is called the
transversal. In the example below, eight angles are formed when parallel
lines m and n are cut by a transversal line, t.
There are several special pairs of angles formed from this figure. Some
pairs have already been reviewed:
Vertical pairs: 1 and 4

2 and 3
5 and 8
6 and 7
Recall that all pairs of vertical angles are congruent.
Supplementary pairs: 1 and 2

2 and 4
3 and 4
1 and 3
5 and 6
6 and 8
7 and 8
5 and 7
Recall that supplementary angles are angles whose angle measure adds
up to 180°. All of these supplementary pairs are linear pairs. There are other
supplementary pairs described in the shortcut later in this section.
There are three other special pairs of angles. These pairs are congruent
pairs.
GLOSSARY
ALTERNATE INTERIOR ANGLES two angles in the interior of the parallel lines, and
on opposite (alternate) sides of the transversal. Alternate interior angles are non-adja-
cent and congruent.
ALTERNATE EXTERIOR ANGLES two angles in the exterior of the parallel lines, and
on opposite (alternate) sides of the transversal. Alternate exterior angles are non-adja-
cent and congruent.
CORRESPONDING ANGLES two angles, one in the interior and one in the exterior,
that are on the same side of the transversal. Corresponding angles are non-adjacent
and congruent.
Use the following diagram of parallel lines cut by a transversal to answer

the example problems.
Example:
What is the measure of ∠8?
The angle marked with measure 53° and ∠8 are alternate exterior
angles. They are in the exterior, on opposite sides of the transversal.
Because they are congruent, the measure of ∠8 = 53°.
Example:
What is the measure of ∠7?
∠8 and ∠7 are a linear pair; they are supplementary. Their measures
add up to 180°. Therefore, ∠7 = 180 – 53 = 127°.
SHORTCUTS
" 1. When a transversal cuts parallel lines, all of the acute angles formed
are congruent, and all of the obtuse angles formed are congruent.
In the figure above, 1, 4, 5, and 7 are all acute angles. They are
all congruent to each other. 1 4 are vertical angles. 4 5 are
alternate interior angles, and 5 7 are vertical angles. The same
reasoning applies to the obtuse angles in the figure: 2, 3, 6, and
8 are all congruent to each other.
2. When parallel lines are cut by a transversal line, any one acute
angle formed and any one obtuse angle formed are supplementary.
From the figure, you can see that ∠3 and ∠4 are supplementary
because they are a linear pair. Notice also that ∠3 ≅ ∠7, since they are
corresponding angles. Therefore, you can substitute ∠7 for ∠3 and
know that ∠7 and ∠4 are supplementary.
Example:
In the following figure, there are two parallel lines cut by a transver-
sal. Which marked angle is supplementary to ∠1?
The angle supplementary to ∠1 is ∠6. ∠1 is an obtuse angle, and

any one acute angle, paired with any obtuse angle are supplemen-
tary angles. This is the only angle marked that is acute.
SOLVING GEOMETRY PROBLEMS

BY USING ALGEBRA
Often, problems will test your knowledge of these angle pairs and your skill
in equation solving.
Example:
Use the following diagram to give the measure of ∠DEC.
In the diagram, the vertical pair is congruent; therefore each angle

has the same measure. Use algebra to solve the problem:
2x + 30 = 3x – 10 Set up the algebraic equation.
2x – 2x + 30 = 3x – 2x – 10 Subtract 2x from both sides.
30 = x – 10 Combine like terms.
30 + 10 = x – 10 + 10 Add 10 to both sides.
40 = x
Now, substitute 40 into the original expression for ∠DEC:
∠DEC = 3(40) – 10 = 120 – 10 = 110°.
Example:
Given the following parallel lines cut by a transversal, what is the
value of x?
In this diagram, the two marked angles appear to be almost congru-

ent. It is difficult to establish if they are congruent or not. However,
they are both exterior angles on the same side of the transversal. They
are NOT congruent. The two marked angles are supplementary. Use
algebra:
(6x – 10) + (4x + 10) = 180 Set up an equation to find x.
10x 180
= Combine like terms, and divide both
10 10
sides by 10.
x = 18
Example:
Use the figure below of parallel lines cut by a transversal to find the
measure of ∠2.
Because all three angles marked are acute angles, they are all con-
gruent. Use algebra:
3x + 5 = 6x – 25 Set up an equation.
3x + 5 + 25 = 6x – 25 + 25 Add 25 to both sides.
3x + 30 = 6x Combine like terms.
3x – 3x + 30 = 6x – 3x Subtract 3x from both sides.
30 3x
3
sides by 3.
10 = x
Now, use this value to find the measure of the angle. ∠2 = 3x + 5 =
(3 10) + 5 = 35°.
When using algebra to solve problems, be sure what the problem is ask-
ing for. Sometimes, the value of the variable is sought. Other times, the
measure of the angle is required.
EXTRA HELP
O To practice identifying the angles formed by parallel lines and a trans-
versal, visit the website http://studyworksonline.com. Click on Explo-
rations at the top of the website. Then, click on Interactive Geometry
on the left hand side. Finally, click on Alternate Angles. Another help-
ful site is www.shodor.org/interactivate/activities/angles/index.html#.
You will see an activity that tests your knowledge of angle classifica-
tion as well as the identification of the angle types. Another useful site
is www.math.com. On the left sidebar, click on Geometry. Then, under
Basic Building Blocks of Geometry click on Classifying Angles. There
is a series of interactive lessons, followed by a short interactive quiz.
You may also want to reference the book Geometry Success in 20 Min-
utes a Day, Lessons 4 and 5, published by LearningExpress.
TIPS AND STRATEGIES
When working with special angle pairs, remember:
• The sum of the measures of complementary angles is 90°.

• The sum of the measures of supplementary angles is 180°.
• Two adjacent supplementary angles form a linear pair.
• Vertical angles are angles across from each other, when formed by
intersecting lines, rays, or segments.
• Vertical angles are congruent.
• There are special angle pairs formed by two parallel lines cut by a
transversal:
Alternate interior angles are congruent.
Alternate exterior angles are congruent.
Corresponding angles are congruent.
• All of the acute angles formed by two parallel lines cut by a trans-
versal are congruent.
• All of the obtuse angles formed by two parallel lines cut by a trans-
versal are congruent.
• When parallel lines are cut by a transversal, any one acute angle and
any one obtuse angle are supplementary.
PRACTICE QUIZ
Try these 25 problems. When you are finished, review the answers and
explanations to see if you have mastered this concept.
1. In the following figure of two intersecting lines, what is the measure

of ∠2?
a. 38°
b. 58°
c. 71°
d. 142°
e. 42°
2. What is the value of x, shown below?
a. 60°
b. 26°
c. 14°
d. 10°
e. 120°
Use the following diagram of parallel lines cut by a transversal to answer

questions 3 through 9.
3. What is the measure of ∠8?

a. 45°
b. 145°
c. 55°
d. 135°
e. 155°

a. 45°
b. 145°
c. 135°
d. 55°
e. 155°

a. 45°
b. 135°
c. 180°
d. 55°
e. 100°
6. What type of angle pair is ∠1 and ∠5?

a. alternate interior angles
b. supplementary angles
c. corresponding angles
d. alternate exterior angles
e. vertical angles

a. 55°
b. 180°
c. 80°
d. 45°
e. 135°
8. What type of angle pair is ∠1 and ∠3?

a. alternate interior angles
b. supplementary angles
c. corresponding angles
d. alternate exterior angles
e. vertical angles
9. In the diagram, what is the value of x?

a. 21°
b. 27°
c. 4°
d. 135°
e. 20°
10. What are the values of the two angles shown in the figure below?
a. 18° and 152°

b. 30° and 150°
c. 45° and 135°
d. 42° and 138°
e. 60° and 120°
11. What is the measure of the complement of 62°?

a. 38°
b. 28°
c. 118°
d. 128°
e. 62°
12. Which of the following statements is ALWAYS TRUE when paral-

lel lines are cut by a transversal?
a. The sum of the degree measure of corresponding angles is 180°.
b. The sum of the degree measure of complementary angles is 180°.
c. The angles in a vertical pair are acute.
d. Corresponding angles are supplementary.
e. Corresponding angles are congruent.
13. In the figure below of parallel lines cut by a transversal, which angle
is supplementary to ∠8?
a. ∠1
b. ∠3
c. ∠4
d. ∠5
e. none of the above
14. Using the figure below, which of the statements is true?
a. ∠ABD ≅ ∠DBC
b. ∠ABD and ∠ABC are adjacent angles.
c. ∠ABD and ∠DBC are complementary.
d. ∠DBC is half of the measure of ∠ABC.
e. All of the above are true.
15. What is the value of x?
a. 7°
b. 10°
c. 9°
d. 68°
e. 22°
16. Use the following figure to determine which statements is true.
a. ∠ABD and ∠DBC are a linear pair.

b. ∠ABE and ∠EBC are adjacent.
c. ∠DBE and ∠EBC are adjacent.
d. ∠EBC and ∠EBA are a linear pair.
17. What is the measure of ∠ABC?
a. 25°
b. 75°
c. 108°
d. 150°
e. 100°
18. Which of the following statements is true about the figure?
a. ∠DBC measures 180°.

b. ∠BAC is a right angle.
c. ∠CBA and ∠ABD are supplementary.
d. choices a and c
19. What are the values of the two angles?
a. 31° and 159°

b. 62° and 118°
c. 28° and 62°
d. 31° and 149°
e. 31° and 69°
20. What is the value of x in the figure below?
a. 150°
b. 50°
c. 100°
d. 130°
e. 25°
21. In the diagram of parallel lines cut by a transversal, shown below,

which of the following statements is false?
a. ∠3 and ∠4 are vertical angles.

b. ∠5 and ∠8 are corresponding angles.
c. ∠3 and ∠5 are alternate interior angles.
d. ∠2 and ∠8 are alternate exterior angles.
e. All of the above are false.
a. 80°
b. 100°
c. 20°
d. 160°
e. 50°
23. Which of the statements below is ALWAYS TRUE?

a. Supplementary angles are both obtuse angles.
b. Complementary angles are both acute angles.
c. At least one of the angles in a supplementary pair is obtuse.
d. Alternate exterior angles are both obtuse angles.
e. Any two acute angles are complementary.
is the value of x?
a. 9°
b. 75°
c. 115°
d. 3°
e. 5°
25. Two angles are a linear pair. Their measures are represented by
x + 10 and 3x + 10. What are the measures of the angles?
a. 40° and 40°
b. 40° and 140°
c. 50° and 130°
d. 60° and 120°
e. 90° and 90°
ANSWERS
Following are the answers and explanations to the practice quiz. Read them
over carefully for any problems that you answered incorrectly.
1. d. ∠2 and the angle marked as 142° are vertical angles. They are
congruent and have the same measure.
2. c. This is a pair of vertical angles. Their angle measures are equal.

Use algebra to find the value of x:
5x – 10 = 60 Set up the equation.
5x – 10 + 10 = 60 + 10 Add 10 to both sides.
5x 70
5
sides by 5.
x = 14
3. d. The angle marked with the 45° measure and ∠8 are supplemen-
tary. The sum of their angle measure is 180°.
45 + m∠8 = 180 Set up the equation.
45 + m∠8 – 45 = 180 – 45 Subtract 45 from both sides.
m∠8 = 135°
4. a. The corresponding angles are the angle marked with the 45°
measure and ∠3. They are congruent; their angle measures are
equal.
5. a. The angle marked with the 45° measure and ∠6 are vertical
angles. They are congruent; their angle measures are equal.
6. c. ∠1 and ∠5 are corresponding angles. One is in the interior, one is

in the exterior, and they are on the same side of the transversal.
7. d. The angle marked with the 45° measure and ∠2 are alternate
exterior angles. They are congruent; their angle measures are
equal.
8. b. ∠1 and ∠3 are supplementary. Together, they form a straight line,

whose angle measure is 180°.
9. e. When two parallel lines are cut by a transversal, any one acute
angle, together with any one obtuse angle, are supplementary.
Use algebra:
5x + 35 + 45 = 180 Set up an equation.
equation.
5x 100
5
both sides by 5.
x = 20
10. d. These angles form a linear pair. The sum of their degree meas-
ures equals 180°. Use algebra:
3x + 12x – 30 = 180 Set up an equation.
15x – 30 = 180 Combine like terms.
15x 210
15 5
both sides by 15.
x = 14
Now, use this value for x to find the angle measures. One angle is
3x = 3 14 = 42°. The other angle is 12x – 30 = (12 14) – 30 =
168 – 30 = 138°.
11. b. An angle and its complement have angle measures whose sum is
90°. Let x stand for the complement of 62°, and use algebra:
x + 62 = 90 Set up the equation.
x + 62 – 62 = 90 – 62 Subtract 62 from both sides.
x = 28°
12. e. The only statement that is always true is choice e. Choice a is

only true if the two angles have a 90° measure. Choice b is never
true. Choices c and d are sometimes true. The only time that cor-
responding angles are supplementary is when they have the meas-
ure of 90° each.
13. b. The only angle listed that is supplementary to ∠8 is the only

obtuse angle marked, ∠3.
14. c. The only statement that is true is that the sum of the angle measures
of ∠ABD and ∠DBC is 90°. Therefore, they are complementary.
15. a. The two angles marked are complementary because the sum of
their angle measures is 90°. Use algebra to find the value of x:
4x + 40 + 6x – 20 = 90 Set up the equation.
10x 70

10
both sides by 10.
x=7
16. e. All of the statements are true. Adjacent angles share a common
side, and no interior points. Linear pairs are two adjacent angles
whose sum of degrees is 180°, which is a straight line.
17. c. The two marked angles in the figure are vertical angles. Use alge-
bra to solve for the variable x, and then find the measure of the
angle.
x + 8 = 33 Combine like terms.
x + 8 – 8 = 33 – 8 Subtract 8 from both sides.
x = 25
Use the value of 25 in the angle expression 3x + 33 to find the
measure.
(3 25) + 33 = 108°
18. d. Choices a and c are true. ∠DBC measures 180° because it forms a
straight line. The two angles ∠CBA and ∠ABD are supplemen-
tary as they form ∠DBC. Note that ∠BAC is NOT a right angle.
Point B is the vertex of this angle, not point A.
19. b. The two angles are a linear pair, so their angle measures add up to
180°. Use algebra to solve for x, and then find the angle measures.
3x + 25 + 2x = 180 Set up the equation.
equation.
5x 155
5
both sides by 5.
x = 31
Substitute the value of 31 into the expressions to find the angle
measures.
2 31 = 62°, and (3 31) + 25 = 118°
20. b. The two marked angles are vertical angles, and their measures are
equal. Use algebra to solve for x.
x = 3x – 100 Set up an equation.
x – 3x = 3x – 3x – 100 Subtract 3x from both sides.
–2x = –100 Combine like terms.
–2x –100
= –2 Divide both sides by –2.
–2
x = 50°
21. e. All of the statements are false. ∠3 and ∠4 are supplementary

angles. ∠5 and ∠8 are vertical angles. ∠3 and ∠5 are interior
angles on the same side of the transversal. ∠2 and ∠8 are exterior
angles on the same side of the transversal.
22. e. The two angles marked by algebraic expressions are correspon-

ding angles and their measures are equal. ∠2 and 5x + 55 are sup-
plementary. First, use algebra to solve for x and then find the
measure of 5x + 55. Finally, find the measure of ∠2.
3x = 45 Combine like terms.
3x 45
= 3 Divide both sides by 3.
3
x = 15°
The angle marked as 5x + 55 = (5 15) + 55 = 130°.
∠2 = 180 – 130 = 50°
23. b. Choice b is always true. Complementary angles must each be less

than 90°, since the sum of their measures must equal 90°. Supple-
mentary angles do not have to be obtuse. Two angles of 90° are
supplementary. Alternate exterior angles may be either obtuse or
acute.
24. a. The angle of 75° and the angle marked as an algebraic expression
in the figure are supplementary. One of them is acute and the
other is obtuse. If this is difficult to determine, notice that ∠8 and
the angle marked as 75° form a linear pair, and ∠8 and (15x – 30)
are corresponding angles with the same measure. Use algebra to
solve for x.
15x – 30 + 75 = 180 Set up an equation.
15x 135

15 = 1
5 Divide both sides by 15.
x = 9°
25. c. Two angles that are a linear pair have angle measures that add up
to 180°. Use algebra to solve for x, and then find the measure of
the angles by substituting in the value for x.
x + 10 + 3x + 10 = 180 Set up an equation.
4x 160
4
x = 40°
The angle x + 10 is 40 + 10 = 50°, and the other angle
3x + 10 is (3 40) + 10 = 120 + 10 = 130°.
4
Triangles
T he triangle is the fundamental figure in geometry. Virtually all

tests that include geometry will have problems relating to triangles,
so it’s important to have a strong foundation in this area. Before studying
the lessons in this chapter, take this ten-question benchmark quiz. When
you are finished, check the answer key carefully. Follow the suggestions
that follow which are based on how you scored on the quiz.
BENCHMARK QUIZ
1. Which of the following side measures could NOT form a triangle?

a. 6, 8, 10
b. 5, 5, 11
c. 8, 12, 13
d. 2, 7, 8
e. 9, 9, 15
78
TR IAN G LE S 79
2. What is the classification of the following triangle?
a. right isosceles
b. acute scalene
c. obtuse isosceles
d. acute isosceles
e. right scalene
3. Using the triangle below, what is the measure of ∠XYZ?
a. 90°
b. 52°
c. 38°
d. 142°
e. 62°
4. By which method are the two triangles, ΔWXZ and ΔYXZ congruent?
a. SSS
b. AAS
c. SAS
d. SSA
e. cannot be determined
5. Given the following triangle, what is the value of x?
a. 90°
b. 14.8°
c. 18°
d. 2°
e. 54°
6. Given the triangle below, which of the following statements is true?
a. The measure of ∠BAC > the measure of ∠ABC.

b. The measure of ∠ABC > the measure of ∠BCA.
c. The measure of ∠BAC = the measure of ∠BCA.
d. choices a and c
e. choices b and c
7. Given ΔXYZ with exterior angle shown, what is the value of x?
a. 12°
b. 170°
c. 90°
d. 25°
e. 20°
TR IAN G LE S 81
8. Given the following triangle, which of the following statements is

FALSE?
a. The altitude to .

LN is equal to the median of LN

b. LN is an altitude to the triangle.
c. The measure of ∠LMN plus the measure of ∠LNM is equal to 90°.
e. All of the above are false.
9. The angle measures in a triangle are in the ratio of 1 : 2 : 5. What is

the measure of the largest angle?
a. 50°
b. 22.5°
c. 100°
d. 112.5°
e. 45°
10. Use the following figure to find the value of x.
a. 30°
b. 24°
c. 12°
d. 60°
e. 130°
Carefully check your answers, and read through the answer explanations.
Grade yourself, and then follow the suggestions given under Benchmark
Quiz Results.
1. b. The side measures of 5, 5, and 11 cannot form a triangle. If you

add the congruent sides, 5 + 5 = 10, this is not greater than the
third side of 11. The sum of any two sides of a triangle must be
greater than the measure of the third side.
2. e. The triangle is a right triangle, since it has an angle of 90°, as

shown by the small box marked in the angle. The classification by
sides is scalene, since all of the side measurements are different.
3. b. The acute angles of a right triangle are complementary. The sum

of the measures of ∠XYZ and 38° must equal 90°. The measure of
∠XYZ = 90 – 38 = 52°.
4. c. The two triangles both have an angle of 90°, which are congruent.
≅ XY
WX as marked by the single slashes. The triangles share a
common side of ZX, so this is another congruent side. The angle
is between the two congruent sides, so the correct method is side,
angle, side or SAS.
5. c. The sum of the degree measures of the angles in a triangle equals

180°. Use algebra to solve for x.
5x + 8 + 45 + 37 = 180 Set up an equation.
5x 90
5
x = 18°
6. e. Choices b and c are true. The largest angle is opposite to the

largest side. Since
AC is the largest side, ∠ABC has the greatest
measure. ∠A and ∠C are congruent because this is an isosceles tri-
angle, and the base angles of an isosceles triangle are congruent.
7. a. The measure of an exterior angle is equal to the sum of the two

remote interior angles. Use algebra to solve for x.
7x + 6 = 40 + 50 Set up an equation.
7x 84
7
x = 12°
TR IAN G LE S 83
is the altitude to side

8. a. Choice a is the only false statement. LM LN
and the median (not shown in the figure) would extend from
point M to the midpoint of LN .
9. d. The angle measures are given as a ratio, so express them as x, 2x,

and 5x, respectively. Together, their sum adds up to 180°. Use
algebra to solve for x, and then substitute in this value for 5x to
find the largest angle.
x + 2x + 5x = 180 Set up an equation.
8x 180
8
x = 22.5°
Use the value of 22.5 to find the largest angle, 5x:
5 22.5 = 112.5°.
10. a. The sum of the degree measures of the exterior angles of a trian-
gle is 360°. Use algebra to solve for x.
2x + 5x + 20 + 3x + 40 = 360 Set up an equation.
10x 300
10 0
x = 30°
If you answered 8–10 questions correctly, you have a good understanding of

triangle relationships. Read over the chapter, concentrating on the areas where
you were weak. Refer to the shortcut sidebars to pick up any techniques for
saving time when solving triangle problems. Take the quiz at the end of this
chapter to confirm your success with triangle relationship problems.
If you answered 4–7 questions correctly, you need to spend some time on
this chapter. Read through the entire chapter; pay attention to the sidebars
that refer you to more in depth practice, hints, and shortcuts. Work through
the quiz at the end of the chapter to check your progress. The answer expla-
nations will help you through any areas that still need clarification. Visit the
suggested websites for additional practice.
If you answered 1–3 questions correctly, you need to devote your full
attention to this chapter. Many problems in geometry deal with the trian-
gle, so a complete understanding of triangles is crucial for any test that

involves geometry. First, carefully read this chapter and concentrate on the
sidebars and all figures. Be sure you know all the rules outlined in the Rule
Books, and all of the necessary vocabulary. Go to the suggested websites in
the Extra Help sidebar in this chapter, and do extended practice. For fur-
ther study, refer to the book, Geometry Success in 20 Minutes a Day, Lessons
6 and 7, published by LearningExpress.
JUST IN TIME LESSON—TRIANGLES
• Triangle Classification
• The Angles in a Triangle
• The Sides of a Triangle
• Median and Altitude of a Triangle
• Congruent Triangles
Triangles are the most common figure in geometry. In this chapter, the
basic facts and relationships of triangles will be reviewed. Chapters 8 and 9
will cover several real-world applications and important theorems of trian-
gles. Chapter 6 will review the triangle measurements of area and perimeter.
GLOSSARY
POLYGON a closed figure in a plane formed by joining segments at their endpoints
SIDE of a polygon is any one of the segments that make up the polygon
VERTEX of a polygon is any one of the common endpoints that make up the polygon.
The plural of vertex is vertices.
REGULAR POLYGON a polygon in which all of the sides and all of the angles are congruent
TRIANGLE a polygon with three sides
TR IAN G LE S 85
TRIANGLE CLASSIFICATION
Triangles are classified, or grouped, in two different ways. One classifica-

tion distinguishes among the sides, and another by the angles. For a trian-
gle, you can have all three sides congruent (equal measure), or two sides
congruent, or no sides congruent. Congruent sides and congruent angles of
triangles are often marked as in the following figure.
The following diagram shows the classification names when grouping by

sides.
Note that isosceles triangles have two sides congruent, called the legs, and
also two angles congruent, called the base angles. The non-congruent side
is called the base. Equilateral triangles have all sides and all angles congru-
ent. Each of the angles in an equilateral triangle has measure of 60°.
In Chapter 2, angle classification was reviewed. The classification of tri-
angles according to angle measure is shown in the following figure.
Be careful when classifying triangles by angle measure; notice that even

though right triangles and obtuse triangles each have two acute angles, their
classification is not affected by these angles. Acute triangles have all
THREE acute angles.
Example:
Classify this triangle by sides and angles.
To group by sides, notice that there are two sides (AB , BC) that are
congruent. The side classification is isosceles. To group by angles,
note that there is a right angle in this triangle. So, the classification
is right isosceles.
Example:
Classify this triangle by sides and angles.
Because no sides are marked as congruent in this figure, the classifi-

cation by sides is scalene. There is one angle greater than 90° (∠B is
110°); therefore, the angle classification is obtuse. This triangle is
obtuse scalene.
THE ANGLES IN A TRIANGLE
In addition to classifying triangles by angle measure, there are other impor-

tant facts about the measure of the angles in a triangle.
TR IAN G LE S 87
RULE BOOK
E The sum of the measure of the angles in a triangle is equal to 180°.
Example:
Given the following triangle, what is the measure of ∠XYZ?
Since the measure of the other two angles are given as 105° and 45°,
∠XYZ = 180 – (105 + 45), so the measure of ∠XYZ = 180 – 150 =
30°.
Example:
What is the measure of ∠MNO in the triangle shown?
The measure of ∠NMO is given, and ∠NOM is a right angle, as

indicated by the small box drawn in the interior. The measure of
∠MNO = 180 – (90 + 42) = 180 – 132 = 48°.
SHORTCUT
" The two acute angles in every right triangle are complementary; their
sum will be 90°. In the last example, the measure of MNO could have
been found by 90 (the measure of NMO), which is 90 – 42 = 48°.
Example:
Use the following diagram of the triangle to find the missing angle
measures.
In the diagram, the three angles are 114, x and 2x. Use algebra to
solve for the variable x:
x + 2x + 114 = 180 Set up the equation.
3x 66
3
both sides by 3.
x = 22
Use the value of 22 for x, and substitute in to find the value of the
missing angle measures:
The angles are 114°, 22°, and 2 22 = 44°.
Sometimes, problems are presented in which the angle measures are

described as a ratio. In these types of problems, show the measures as the
ratio factor times a variable.
Example:
In a triangle, the angle measures are in the ratio of 2 : 2 : 5. What is
the measure of the angles?
Draw the triangle, showing the angle measures as factors of a vari-
able, such as x:
Use algebra to solve for the variable:

2x + 2x + 5x = 180 Set up the equation.
9x 180
9 9
both sides by 9.
x = 20
TR IAN G LE S 89
Use the value of 20 to substitute in to find the measure of the

angles:
20 2 = 40°, 20 2 = 40°, 20 5 = 100°.
When using algebra to solve geometric problems, be clear on what the

problem is asking for. Sometimes, the value of the variable is requested, and
other times, such as in the last two examples, the measure of the angles is
requested.
Example:
If the angle measures in a triangle are in the ratio of 1 : 2 : 3, what is
the angle classification of the triangle?
The angle measures can be represented by x, 2x, and 3x. Use alge-
bra to find the angle measures:
x + 2x + 3x = 180 Set up the equation.
6x 180
6 6
both sides by 6.
x = 30°
Substitute in the value of 30 for x to get the angle measures. One of
the angles measures 30°, the second angle measures 2 30 = 60°,
and the third angle is 3 30 = 90°. So the triangle classification,
classified by angle, is a right triangle.
GLOSSARY
EXTERIOR ANGLE an angle formed by extending one of the sides of the triangle. This
extended side and one of the other original sides of the triangle define an exterior angle.
RULE BOOK
E The sum of all of the exterior angles in a triangle, or any polygon, is

equal to 360°.
Example:
The following diagram shows the exterior angles to a triangle. In
the diagram, what is the value of x?
The sum of the measure of these exterior angles is equal to 360°.

Use algebra:
2x + 4x + 40 + 4x + 20 = 360 Set up an equation.
10x 300
10 0
both sides by 10.
x = 30°
TR IAN G LE S 91
RULE BOOK
E The measure of an exterior angle to a triangle is equal to the sum of

the measure of the two remote interior angles of the triangle.
In the figure above, the measure of DCA is equal to the measure of

CAB and CBA. So, the measure of DCA = 37 + 72 = 109°.
Example:
Given ΔXYZ, with the exterior angle shown, what is the measure of
∠XYZ?
The exterior angle, whose measure is 120°, is equal to the sum of

the angle of measure 30°, and ∠XYZ. The measure of ∠XYZ =
120 – 30 = 90°.
Example:
What is the value of the variable x in the following figure of a trian-
gle with the exterior angle shown?
Use algebra:
6x = 30 + 42 Set up the equation.
6x 72
= Combine like terms, and divide both sides by 6.
6 6
x = 12°
THE SIDES OF A TRIANGLE
There is an important fact about the measure of the sides of a triangle.
RULE BOOK
E The sum of the measure of any two sides of a triangle is always

greater than the measure of the remaining side.
Example:
Can the measures of 7 inches, 7 inches, and 15 inches form a
triangle?
These side measures are not possible. Add the measures of each pair,
and then ensure that this sum is greater than the third side. This
must work for each pair. Adding 7 + 7 = 14, and 14 < 15, so these
measures are not possible.
Example:
Can the measures of 7 inches, 9 inches, and 15 inches form a
triangle?
Test the sum of each pair; 7 + 9 = 16, and 16 > 15; 7 + 15 = 22, and
22 > 9; 9 + 15 = 24, and 24 > 7. All three pairs pass the test. These
measures can form a triangle.
SHORTCUT
" The range of possible measures for a side of a triangle, when given
the other two sides, is between the sum of the two sides, and the dif-
ference of the two sides.
Example:
If two sides of a triangle are 3 and 9, what is the range of values pos-
sible for the third side of the triangle?
The sum of any two sides must be greater than the third side. Use the
variable x for the third side and then use the inequality that 3 + x > 9.
Subtracting 3 from both sides of the inequality yields that x > 6. The
third side must also be less than 12, since it must be smaller than the
sum of 3 and 9. Set up this inequality, x < 3 + 9, or x < 12. So, the
range of possible measures is greater than 6 but less than 12.
RULE BOOK
E In every triangle, the longest side is opposite the largest angle, and the
shortest side is opposite the smallest angle.
In an isosceles triangle, the congruent sides, called the legs, are
opposite the congruent angles, called the base angles.
TR IAN G LE S 93
ALTITUDE AND MEDIAN OF A TRIANGLE
GLOSSARY
ALTITUDE of a triangle is a segment perpendicular to one of the sides of the triangle.
The length of the altitude extends from the side to the vertex opposite to the side in
question. There are three altitudes in every triangle.
MEDIAN of a triangle is a segment whose endpoints are a vertex of the triangle and
the midpoint of the opposite side
SHORTCUT
" In an isosceles triangle, the median to the base is the same as the alti-
tude to the base.
In a right triangle, two of the altitudes are sides of the triangle, the
sides that form the right angle.
Example:
is the median to
Given the following triangle, and the fact that YW

XZ, what is the length of XZ?
Since , it bisects

YW is a median to XZ XZ. Use algebra:
3x = 5x – 10 Set up the equation.
3x + 10 = 5x – 10 + 10 Add 10 to both sides.
10 2x
2
both sides by 2.
5=x
Use the value of 5 to find the measure of
XZ: (3 5) + (5 5 – 10)
= 15 + 25 – 10 = 40 – 10 = 30.
Example:
In the following triangle, which of the following statements is true?
a. ΔABC is an isosceles triangle.

b. The median to AC is the same segment as the altitude to AC
.
c. ΔABD is a right triangle.
d. ΔABC is an acute triangle.
TR IAN G LE S 95
The correct response is choice e. All of the three choices are true. Choice
a is true because two of the sides have equal measure. Choice b is true
because in an isosceles triangle, the median of the base is the same as the alti-
tude to the base. Choice c is true because this triangle contains a 90° angle.
Choice d is true because for this triangle, all of the angles are less than 90°.
CONGRUENT TRIANGLES
Recall from Chapter 2 that two figures are congruent if they have the same
shape and the same size. Look at the following congruent triangles. They
have the same size and the same shape. Imagine lifting one of them and
placing it on top of the other. Both sides and vertices could be matched up.
These matching sides and vertices are referred to as corresponding sides

and corresponding vertices. In the diagram, L would correspond to X; M
would correspond to Y; and O would correspond to Z.
RULE BOOK
E Corresponding sides of congruent triangles are congruent.

Corresponding angles of congruent triangles are congruent.
When naming congruent triangles, the corresponding vertices are
listed in the same order. This rule is followed so that when given the
statement ΔABC ΔDEF, you know the corresponding parts even with-
out a diagram. In the above congruence, AB is congruent to
DE, and
BCA EFD. This is just two of six corresponding congruent parts
that are defined by the triangle congruence statement. The following
triangles are a possible picture for the congruence statement given.
Example:
In the following diagram of congruent triangles, what is the value of
the variable x?
In the diagram ∠ABC ≅ ∠DEF. The measure of ∠ABC = 30°. Use

algebra to solve for the variable x:
3x 45
3
both sides by 3.
x = 15°
TR IAN G LE S 97
Example:
Given that ΔABC ≅ ΔLMN, which of the following is true?
a. ∠BAC ≅ ∠MNL
≅ AB
b. LN
c. ∠CBA ≅ ∠NML
≅ AB
d. MN
e. ∠ABC ≅ ∠LNM
Choice c is the only true statement. Use the congruence statement to

establish the congruent vertices. Vertex A corresponds to L, B corresponds
to M, and C corresponds to N.
Example:
Given the following congruent triangles, what is the value of the
variable x?
≅ ST
ΔRST ≅ ΔLMN; MN . Use algebra to solve for the variable x:

4x 36
4
both sides by 4.
x=9
Triangle congruence can be assured without knowing all the measures of

all of the sides and angles. There are special cases for testing congruence
that only involve three corresponding parts of the triangles. These are
mathematical methods that have been proven and are always true. The
proof of these methods is beyond the scope of this book. However, knowl-
edge of the methods is important in order to test triangle congruence.
RULE BOOK
E There are four established methods of testing triangle congruence.
SSS (Side-Side-Side) method states that if the three sides of one

triangle are congruent to the three sides of another triangle, the
triangles are congruent.
SAS (Side-Angle-Side) method states that if two sides and the
angle that they form (the included angle) are congruent to two
sides and the included angle of another triangle, the triangles are
congruent. The angle MUST be between the sides for this
method to hold true.
ASA (Angle-Side-Angle) method states that if two angles and the
side between them (the included side) are congruent to two
angles and the included side of another triangle, then the trian-
gles are congruent. The side MUST be between the angles for
this method to hold true.
AAS (Angle-Angle-Side) method states that if two angles and a
side not included are congruent to two angles and the corre-
sponding side not included, the triangles are congruent. One of
the angles MUST be between the other angle and side for this
method to hold true.
When you are asked to determine triangle congruence, be careful. Note

that AAA (Angle-Angle-Angle) and SSA (Side-Side-Angle) are NOT meth-
ods that can be used to establish congruence! In addition, if a test question
asks whether two triangles are congruent, you cannot assume congruence
just because they appear congruent. You may encounter test questions that
give a drawing of two triangles and limited information about the triangles.
The methods above may be needed to establish whether the two triangles
are congruent.
Example:
In the following two triangles, what method could be used to estab-
lish congruence, based on the information given?
TR IAN G LE S 99
The correct response is the ASA method. In the diagram, the con-
gruent parts that are marked are two angles, and the side that is in
between these angles. If information is given in words, label the tri-
angles with the congruence symbols and then use the figure to
determine the correct method. In triangle congruence problems,
look for shared sides. If two triangles share a common side, then this
is a side that can be used to establish congruence.
Example:
is the perpendicular bisector of ΔABC, shown below,
Given that AD
what method can be used to establish congruence of ΔADC and
ΔADB?
Draw in the perpendicular bisector, including the marking for the

right angle and the congruent segments. The two triangles share the
common side of AD . This is marked with an “X.”
From the drawing, it is apparent that the method is SAS, since it is

two congruent sides and the included angle between them.
Triangles may also overlap. It is helpful in these cases to show the

triangles separated, as in the following diagram. When separated,
mark all congruent parts.
Example:
Given the following ΔGHI and ΔJIH, what method could be used to
establish that the two triangles are congruent?
Separate the triangles, and transfer the markings. Mark the shared
, as congruent in the two triangles.
segment, that is HI
From the drawing, the method is AAS. The marked congruence is

an angle, then another angle, which is the right angle, and then a
side, which is the shared side. One of the angles is in between the
other angle and side.
TR IAN G LE S 101
EXTRA HELP
O The website www.math.com has an interactive lesson on triangles. On
the left sidebar, click on Geometry. Then, under Polygons, click on Tri-
angles. There is a series of interactive lessons, followed by a short inter-
active quiz. Another website is http://library.thinkquest.org/20991/geo/
index.html. Upon reaching this site, click on Congruent Triangles, located
on the left-hand list. For more information and practice on working with
triangles, reference the book Geometry Success in 20 Minutes a Day,
published by LearningExpress.
TIPS AND STRATEGIES
When working with triangles, remember:
• Triangles are classified one way according to the angle measure and
are classified a second way according to side measure.
• For a triangle to be classified as acute, all three angles must be acute
angles.
• The sum of the degree measure of the angles in a triangle is 180°.
• The two acute angles in a right triangle are complementary.
• The sum of the degree measure of the three exterior angles of a tri-
angle is 360°.
• The measure of an exterior angle to a triangle is equal to the sum
of the measure of the two remote interior angles.
• An altitude to a side of a triangle is the perpendicular segment to
that side.
• A median is a segment whose endpoints are a vertex of the triangle
and the midpoint of the opposite side.
• Corresponding sides of congruent triangles are congruent.
• Corresponding angles of congruent triangles are congruent.
• There are four methods to establish triangle congruence: SSS, SAS,
AAS, and ASA.
• The methods of AAA and SSA are not acceptable methods to estab-
lish congruence.
When you are taking a multiple-choice test, remember these tips to

improve your score:
• For triangle problems that ask for a method to establish congru-

ence, immediately eliminate any methods that are AAA, or SSA.
• For triangle problems that ask for a method to establish congru-

ence, only use the information given. Do not make assumptions
based on the appearance of the figure.
PRACTICE QUIZ
1. Which of the following side measures could NOT form a triangle?

a. 3, 4, and 5
b. 6, 6, and 12
c. 12, 13, and 15
d. 5, 5, and 5
e. 4, 7, and 10
2. If two sides of a triangle are 6 and 10, what is the exact range of pos-
sible measure for the third side?
a. any measure less than 6
b. any measure greater than 10
c. a measure between 6 and 10 only
d. a measure between 4 and 16 only
e. A triangle is not possible with side lengths of 6 and 10.
a. acute obtuse
b. acute scalene
c. acute isosceles
d. acute right
e. obtuse scalene
TR IAN G LE S 103
a. acute right
b. acute isosceles
c. right isosceles
d. acute scalene
e. isosceles scalene
5. By which method are ΔABC and ΔDBC congruent, given the figure
is a perpendicular bisector of
below and the fact that BC AD?
a. SAS
b. SSS
c. AAS
d. SAA
e. SSA
6. By which method are the two triangles congruent, given the follow-
ing figures?
a. SAS
b. AAS
c. ASA
d. SSS
e. SSA
7. Given the following triangle, what is the measure of ∠SRT?
a. 44°
b. 224°
c. 47°
d. 89°
e. 4.4°
8. What is the value of x in the following triangle?
a. 48
b. 12
c. 60
d. 15
e. 19.5
9. Which of the statements is ALWAYS true about the following triangle?
is an altitude of ΔABC.
a. AB
is a median of ΔABC.
b. AB
c. ΔABC is acute isosceles.
≅ BC
d. AC
e. ∠ABC ≅ ∠ACB
TR IAN G LE S 105
10. Given the following diagram, which statement is true?
a. The measure of
ST is less than the measure of
RS.
b. The measure of .
ST is greater than the measure of RT
.
c. The measure of RT is greater than the measure of ST
d. The measure of ∠SRT is equal to 80°.
e. The measure of ∠SRT is equal to 100°.
11. Given ΔBDC with exterior angles shown, what is the degree measure
of ∠ABD?
a. 120°
b. 30°
c. 93°
d. 10°
e. 12°
12. Given the two congruent triangles LMN and RST shown, what is the
?
length of LN
a. 7
b. 56
c. 63
d. 28
e. 91
13. Use the following diagram of a triangle with the three exterior angles
shown to find the value of the variable x.
a. 90°
b. 360°
c. 120°
d. 10°
e. 18°
14. Use the figure of congruent triangles below to find the value of the
variable x.
a. 43°
b. 10°
c. 24°
d. 8.6°
e. 120°
15. In the triangle below, . What is the length of

US is the median to RT

RT?
a. 3
b. 20
c. 15.72
d. 31
e. 40
TR IAN G LE S 107
16. The ratio of the degree measure of the angles in a triangle is 2 : 3 : 5.

What is the angle classification of the triangle?
a. obtuse triangle
b. right triangle
c. straight triangle
d. acute triangle
e. isosceles triangle
17. The ratio of the degree measure of the exterior angles to a triangle is
5 : 6 : 9. What is the measure of the largest exterior angle?
a. 162°
b. 180°
c. 90°
d. 108°
e. 262°
18. Given that ΔXYZ is an isosceles triangle where

XZ is the base and
YM
is the median to the base, by which method below can it be estab-
lished that ΔXYM ≅ ΔZYM?
a. AAA
b. SSA
c. ASA
d. SSS
e. AAS
19. The two acute angles in a right triangle are in the ratio of 2 : 4. What
is the measure of the smallest angle?
a. 15°
b. 30°
c. 90°
d. 60°
e. 120°
20. Given the following diagram of two triangles, which methods can be
used to determine congruence?
a. SAS
b. SSA
c. SSS
d. either choice a or b
e. either choice a or c
21. What is the degree measure of an exterior angle to an equilateral tri-

angle?
a. 60°
b. 180°
c. 300°
d. 120°
e. 360°
22. Given the following diagram of ΔABC, which of the following state-
ments is true?
a. ΔABC is an acute scalene triangle.

is greater than the measure of AC
b. The measure of BC .
.
c. The measure of AB is greater than the measure of BC
d. The measure of AC is greater than the measure of
BC.
23. Classify the following triangle by angles and sides.
a. obtuse isosceles
b. right scalene
c. right isosceles
d. acute obtuse
e. isosceles scalene
TR IAN G LE S 109
24. Given the following overlapping triangles, by what method can it be

established that ΔABC ≅ ΔDCB?
a. SSS
b. SAS
c. AAS
d. AAA
e. SSA
25. In the following figure of overlapping triangles, by what method can

it be established that the two triangles are congruent?
a. SAS
b. AAA
c. SSS
d. AAS
e. ASA
ANSWERS
Here are the answers, with detailed explanations, for the triangle practice
quiz. Study the explanations for any questions that you answered incor-
rectly. Then, go back and try the problems again.
1. b. The measures of 6, 6, and 12 cannot form a triangle. The sum of

two of the sides, that is 6 + 6 = 12, is equal to the third side. The
sum of any two sides must be GREATER than the third side.
2. d. To find the exact range of possible values, remember the shortcut

that the third side must be greater than the difference, that is
10 – 6 = 4. The third side must also be smaller than the sum, that
is 10 + 6 = 16.
3. e. The classification is scalene; all of the sides have a different meas-

ure. The angle classification is obtuse because one of the angles,
namely 120°, is obtuse.
4. c. The classification is isosceles because two of the sides have equal

measure. The angle classification is “right,” as shown by the small
box marked in one of the angles.
5. a. Since
BC is a perpendicular bisector of
AD, it forms right angles
, creating the two congruent segments
and bisects AD .
AC and CD
Draw in these congruent parts as shown:
;
From the figure, the two triangles share the common side of BC
this is the third congruent part. The correct method is SAS,
because the right angle is between the congruent sides.
6. b. The method for congruence is angle-angle-side, or AAS, since

one of the angles is between the other angle and side.
7. a. The sum of the degree measure of the angles in a triangle is 180°.

The measure of ∠SRT = 180 – 89 – 47 = 180 – 136 = 44°.
8. b. The two acute angles in a right triangle are complementary. Use

algebra to solve for x.
TR IAN G LE S 111
4x + 12 + 30 = 90 Set up an equation.
4x 48
4
x = 12
is an altitude of ΔABC. AB
9. a. The only true statement is that AB is
not a median of ΔABC. The median bisects a side of the triangle.
The classification of ΔABC is right isosceles, not acute isosceles.
The congruent sides are AB and BC. AC
is not congruent to the
other sides. ∠ABC and ∠ACB cannot be congruent; there is at
most one right angle in a triangle.
10. c. The measure of because

RT is greater than the measure of ST
∠RST is the largest angle, and the largest side is opposite to the
largest angle in a triangle.
11. a. The degree measure of an exterior angle to a triangle is equal to

the sum of the other two interior angles. Use algebra to solve for
the variable x, and then find the measure of the angle.
10x + 20 = 5x + 7x Set up an equation.
20 = 2x Combine like terms.
20 2x
2
10 = x
Use the value of 10 for x to find the measure of 10x + 20:
(10 10) + 20 = 100 + 20 = 120°.
and
12. c. The congruent sides are LN RT, based on the given congru-
ence statement. Use algebra to solve for the variable a, and then
find the length of
LN.
a + 56 = 9a Set up an equation.
a – a + 56 = 9a – a Subtract a from both sides.
56 = 8a Combine like terms.
56 8a
8 8
7=a
Substitute in the value of 7 to find the length of

LN = a + 56; 7 + 56 = 63.
13. d. The sum of the degree measure of the exterior angles to a triangle
is 360°. Use algebra to solve for x.
(8x + 30) + (6x + 60) + (10x + 30) = 360 Set up an equation.
24x 240
24 4
x = 10
14. c. ∠XZY is congruent to ∠ACB by using the marking that shows

these angles to be congruent. Their measures are equal. The
measure of ∠ACB is 120°, because the sum of the angle measures
in a triangle is 180°, and 180 – 43 – 17 = 120. Use algebra to solve
for x.
5x 120
5 5
x = 24
15. e. The median US bisects RT

. From this information, and
RS ≅ ST
their measures are equal. Use algebra to solve for m, and then find
.
the length of RT
9m – 7 = 2m + 14 Set up an equation.
9m – 2m – 7 = 2m – 2m + 14 Subtract 2m from both sides.
7m – 7 = 14 Combine like terms.
7m – 7 + 7 = 14 + 7 Add 7 to both sides.
7m 21
7
both sides by 7.
m=3
Use the value of 3 to find the length of RT: 9m – 7 + 2m + 14;
(9 3) – 7 + (2 3) + 14 = 27 – 7 + 6 + 14 = 40.
TR IAN G LE S 113
16. b. The sum of the degree measures of the angles in a triangle is 180°.
Because ratios are given for angle measure, express these meas-
ures as 2x, 3x, and 5x respectively. Use algebra to solve for x, and
then find the measure of the angles to find the classification.
2x + 3x + 5x = 180 Set up an equation.
10x 180
10 10
both sides by 10.
x = 18
Using the value of 18 for x, the angle measures are 2 18 = 36,
3 18 = 54, and 5 18 = 90. The angle classification is a right
triangle because one of the angles is 90°.
17. a. The sum of the degree measures of the exterior angles in a triangle
is 360°. Because ratios are given for angle measure, express these
measures as 5x, 6x, and 9x respectively. Use algebra to solve for x,
and then find the measure of the largest angle.
20x 360
20 20
both sides by 20.
x = 18
The largest angle is 9 times x, which is 162°.
18. d. Draw the isosceles triangle with given information:
The fact that ΔXYZ is an isosceles triangle means that

XY and YZ

are congruent. Because YM is the median to the base, XM ≅ MZ.
The two triangles share a common side YM, which is the third nec-
essary congruent part. The method is side-side-side, or SSS.
19. b. The degree measure of the two acute angles in a right triangle add
up to 90°. A ratio is given, so use the expressions 2x and 4x to rep-
resent the acute angles. Use algebra to solve for x, and then find
the measure of the smallest angle, which is 2 times x.
2x + 4x = 90 Set up an equation.
6x 90
6 6
both sides by 6.
x = 15
The smallest angle is 2 times 15, which is 30°.
20. e. There are two possible methods to establish congruence, that is

SAS or SSS. The two triangles share a common side and the other
two sides are marked as congruent. In addition, the small box in
the interior of the angle indicates these segments are perpendicu-
lar, so both triangles have the congruent angle of 90°. Note that
even though the diagram shows congruent parts of side-side-
angle, or SSA, this is NOT an acceptable method to use to estab-
lish congruence.
21. d. The angles in an equilateral triangle are all congruent. Since their
measure must add up to 180°, each interior angle is 60°. The
measure of an exterior angle is equal to the sum of the two remote
interior angles, so the measure of an exterior angle in this case is
60 + 60 = 120°.
22. d. The longest side is opposite to the largest angle. Because ∠ABC =
128°, the side with the greatest measure is opposite this angle,
. Note also that BC
AC > AB because ∠BAC > ∠BCA.
23. a. The triangle is obtuse because one of the angles is greater than
90°. The classification is isosceles because two of the sides are
congruent, as shown by the markings on the triangle.
TR IAN G LE S 115
24. b. First, separate the two triangles, and mark all congruent parts.
Remember that BC is a shared side, so should be marked as con-
gruent on both:
From the new diagram, the method is clearly side-angle-side, or

SAS. The angle is between the two congruent sides.
25. e. First, separate the two triangles, and mark all congruent parts.
Remember that ∠BCD is a shared angle, so it should be marked as
congruent on both:
From the new diagram, the method is angle-side-angle, or ASA.

The side is between the two congruent angles.
5
Quadrilaterals
and Circles
C hapter 4 introduced the basic facts about triangles. This chap-
ter concentrates on the other two most common closed figures—
the quadrilateral and the circle. Start your study of these figures by taking
the ten-question benchmark quiz. Grade yourself and read through the
answer explanations to determine how much knowledge you already have
on these topics.
BENCHMARK QUIZ
1. Which of the following statements is FALSE?

a. All squares are rhombuses.
b. All trapezoids are quadrilaterals.
c. All trapezoids have two congruent sides.
d. All squares are rectangles.
e. All rhombuses are parallelograms.
116
Q UAD R I LATE R A LS AN D C I R C LE S 117
2. Which of the following statements is ALWAYS true?

a. The diagonals of a rectangle are congruent.
b. The diagonals of a rhombus are congruent.
c. The diagonals of a parallelogram are congruent.
d. The diagonals of a trapezoid are congruent.
e. All of the above are always true.
3. Using rectangle QRST below, what is the measure of

RS?
a. 112
b. 120
c. 12
d. 8
e. 72
4. In the following parallelogram, what is the value of the variable x?
a. 40°
b. 4°
c. 6°
d. 22°
e. 60°
5. In the following rectangle ABCD, the measure of BD = 84, and the

measure of AE = 6x. What is the value of the variable x?
a. 14
b. 7
c. 84
d. 28
e. 3.5
6. Given the following circle, what is the measure of ∠ABC?
a. 80°
b. 160°
c. 50°
d. 100°
e. 40°
7. In the following circle, the measure of ∠AOB = 70°. What is the

+
measure of CB?
a. 70°
b. 140°
c. 145°
d. 110°
e. 115°
?
8. In the following circle, what is the measure of DC
a. 36
b. 8
c. 28
d. 6
e. 42
?
9. In the following circle, what is the measure of AC
a. 27
b. 6
c. 12
d. 15
e. 24
10. In the following circle, what is the measure of

DB?
a. 12
b. 3
c. 18
d. 20
e. 22
Carefully check your answers, and read through the answer explanations.
Grade yourself, and then follow the suggestions given under Benchmark
Quiz Results.
1. c. Not all trapezoids have two congruent sides. Only isosceles trape-
zoids have two congruent sides. Every square is both a rhombus
and a rectangle. A trapezoid is a quadrilateral; it has four sides.
Every rhombus is a parallelogram.
2. a. The diagonals of a rectangle are always congruent. The only time

a rhombus has congruent diagonals is when the rhombus is a
square. The only time a parallelogram has congruent diagonals is
when it is a rectangle. The only time a trapezoid has congruent
diagonals is when it is an isosceles trapezoid.
3. a. The opposite sides of a rectangle are congruent. Use this fact and
algebra to find the value of the variable x. Use this value to calcu-
late the length of
RS.
5x – 3x = 3x + 24 – 3x Subtract 3x from both sides.
2x 24
2
x = 12
Use this value of 12 to find the length of
RS:
10x – 8 = (10 12) – 8 = 120 – 8 = 112.
4. b. The measure of the consecutive angles in a parallelogram add up

to 180°. Use algebra:
10x 40
10
x=4
5. b. The diagonals of a rectangle are congruent; they also bisect each

other. The measure of
AC = 6x + 6x = 12x. Use algebra:
12x 84
12 12
x=7
6. e. The measure of an inscribed angle is one-half the measure of the

arc that it intercepts. The measure of ∠ABC = 80 ÷ 2 = 40°.
is a diameter of the circle, therefore CA

7. d. AC + = 180°. The measure
+ is equal to the measure of the central angle shown, that is
of AB
+ = 180 – 70 = 110°.
70°. The measure of CB
8. c. For the two secants shown, the lengths are in the relationship of
(outer piece) times (whole segment) = (outer piece) times (whole
segment). Use algebra to find the value of x, and then find the
.
length of DC
6(3x + 6) = 8(2x + 8) Set up an equation.
(6 3x) + (6 6) = (8 2x) + (8 8) Use the distributive
property.
18x + 36 = 16x + 64 Multiply in the
parentheses.
18x + 36 – 16x = 16x + 64 – 16x Subtract 16x from
both sides.
2x + 36 – 36 = 64 – 36 Subtract 36 from both
sides.
2x 28
2
x = 14
The length of
DC is 2x, so the length is 2 14 = 28.
9. e. For the secant and tangent shown, the lengths are in the relation-
ship of (outer piece) times (whole segment) = (tangent)2. Use alge-
bra to find the value of x, which is the length of
AC.
3(x + 3) = 92 Set up an equation.
(3 x) + (3 3) = 92 Use the distributive property.
3x + 9 = 81 Multiply.
3x 72
3
x = 24 .
This is the length of AC
10. d. Multiply the two segments of one chord together. This value is
equal to the product of the two segments of the other chord
shown. Use algebra to find the value of the variable x. Use this
value to find the length of
DB.
8(4x) = 6(16) Set up an equation.
32x = 96 Multiply.
32x 96
32
x=3
: 4x + 8 = (4 3) + 8 =
Use this value of 3 to find the length of DB
12 + 8 = 20.
If you answered 8–10 questions correctly, quadrilaterals and circles are

strengths for you. Read over the chapter, concentrating on the areas where
you were weak. Refer to the sidebars to pick up techniques and vocabulary.
The benchmark quiz did not cover all the material in the chapter; work
through the end of the Practice Quiz to ensure that you have a full under-
standing of these topics.
If you answered 4–7 questions correctly, spend some time on this chap-
ter. Read through the entire chapter. Pay attention to the sidebars that refer
you to more in-depth practice, hints, and shortcuts. Work through the
Practice Quiz at the end of the chapter to check your progress. The answer
explanations will help you through any areas that still need clarification.
Visit the suggested websites for additional practice.
If you answered 1–3 questions correctly, you need a thorough review of
quadrilaterals and circles. First, carefully read this chapter and concentrate
on the sidebars and all figures. Be sure you know all the rules outlined in
the Rule Book sidebars, and all of the necessary vocabulary. Go to the sug-
gested websites in the Extra Help sidebar in this chapter and do extended
practice. For further study, refer to the book, Geometry Success in 20 Min-
utes a Day, Lesson 10, published by LearningExpress.
JUST IN TIME LESSON—

QUADRILATERALS AND CIRCLES
• Quadrilateral Classification
• The Angles in a Quadrilateral
• The Sides and Diagonals of Quadrilaterals
• The Parts of a Circle
• Angles and Arcs Related to Circles and Their Measure
• Segment Measures as Related to Circles
This chapter examines the basic facts and relationships of quadrilaterals

and circles. Chapter 6 will review the measurements of area and perimeter.
Chapter 7 will cover surface area and volume of three-dimensional figures.
QUADRILATERAL CLASSIFICATION
GLOSSARY
QUADRILATERAL a four sided polygon
Four-sided polygons are called quadrilaterals and, like triangles, there are
classifications for quadrilaterals. A quadrilateral with one pair of parallel
sides (bases) is called a trapezoid.
In an isosceles trapezoid, the non-base sides are congruent. An example can

be found in figure II in the above graphic. Because the parallel bases are not
the same length in a trapezoid, we call these bases b1 and b2.
A quadrilateral with two pairs of parallel sides is called a parallelogram.

The two sets of opposite sides that are parallel are congruent in a parallel-
ogram, as shown in the following figures:
Parallelograms are broken down into further sub-groups.

A rectangle is a parallelogram with four right angles. Refer to figure III,
above.
A rhombus is a parallelogram with four congruent sides. Refer to fig-
ure I, above.
A square is a parallelogram with both four right angles and four con-
gruent sides. A square is a rhombus, a rectangle, a parallelogram,
and a quadrilateral. Refer to figure IV, above.
This Venn diagram may help you to understand the classification of four-
sided figures:
For example, in the Venn diagram a rectangle is a parallelogram and a

quadrilateral since it is contained in the other classifications. A square is a
rectangle, rhombus, parallelogram, and a quadrilateral. A trapezoid is not
a parallelogram; it is not contained in the parallelogram sub-group.
Example:
Which of the following statements is FALSE?
a. A square is a parallelogram.
b. A rhombus is a quadrilateral.
c. A trapezoid is a quadrilateral.
d. A rectangle is a trapezoid.
e. A square is a rhombus.
The choice that is false is choice d. A rectangle is NOT a trapezoid.

Refer to the Venn diagram. The rectangle is not contained in the trapezoid
section. All of the other choices are true.
THE ANGLES IN A QUADRILATERAL
RULE BOOK
E The sum of the measure of the angles in a quadrilateral is equal to

360°.
The sum of the measures of any two consecutive angles in a parallel-
ogram is equal to 180°.
There are special rules that govern the angles in some quadrilaterals:
RULE BOOK
E In a parallelogram, opposite angles are congruent. This is true for all

parallelograms, including rectangles, rhombuses, and squares.
In an isosceles trapezoid, the base angles are congruent.

Example:
In the parallelogram below, what is the measure of ∠ABC?
The angle is congruent to the angle opposite, which has measure of

117°. The measure of ∠ABC = 117°.
Example:
In the isosceles trapezoid shown, what is the measure of ∠WXY?
The base angles are congruent. Use algebra to solve for the variable
x, and then find the measure of ∠WXY:
4x + 2 – 4x = 7x – 13 – 4x Subtract 4x from both sides.
15 3x
3
5=x
Use the value of 5 to find the measure of ∠WXY:
4x + 2 = (4 5) + 2 = 20 + 2 = 22°.
GLOSSARY
EXTERIOR ANGLE an angle formed by extending one of the sides of the quadrilateral. This
extended side and the adjacent side of the original quadrilateral define an exterior angle.
RULE BOOK
E An exterior angle and the adjacent interior angle form a linear pair.
The sum of all of the exterior angles in a quadrilateral, or any polygon,

is equal to 360°.
SHORTCUT
" Because opposite angles in a parallelogram are congruent, the oppo-
site exterior angles will also be congruent.
Example:
Given the parallelogram below and the exterior angles shown, what
is the value of the variable x?
These exterior angles are congruent, because the opposite angles of

a parallelogram are congruent. Use algebra:
6x – 18 = 4x + 2 Set up an equation.
6x – 18 – 4x = 4x + 2 – 4x Subtract 4x from both sides.
2x 20
2
x = 10
THE SIDES AND DIAGONALS OF QUADRILATERALS
There are special rules that govern the sides of some quadrilaterals.
RULE BOOK
E In a parallelogram, the opposite sides are congruent. This is true for

all parallelograms, including rectangles, rhombuses, and squares.
In an isosceles trapezoid, the two sides that are not the bases are con-
gruent.
Example:
In the isosceles trapezoid below, what is the value of the variable x?
Use algebra:
4x 28
4
x=7
GLOSSARY
DIAGONAL of a polygon is any segment that connects two non-consecutive vertices
There are helpful rules that govern the diagonals of some quadrilaterals:
RULE BOOK
E The diagonals of every parallelogram bisect each other. This includes

rectangles, rhombuses, and squares.
The diagonals of every rectangle are congruent. This includes

squares.
The diagonals of an isosceles trapezoid are congruent.

RULE BOOK (continued)
E The diagonals of every rhombus are perpendicular. This includes

squares.
This chart summarizes the facts about quadrilaterals:

Example:
Given rectangle LMNO below, the measure of
MO = 126. What is
the value of the variable x?
The diagonals of the rectangle are congruent and they also bisect
is equal to the measure of
each other. The measure of LP PN. Use
algebra:
7x + 7x = 126 Set up an equation.
14x 126
14 4
x=9
EXTRA HELP
O The website www.math.com has an interactive lesson on quadrilater-
als. On the left sidebar, click on Geometry. Then, under Polygons, click
on Quadrilaterals. There is a series of interactive lessons, followed by
a short interactive quiz. Another website is http://library.thinkquest.org/
20991/geo/index.html. Upon reaching this site, click on Quadrilaterals,
or Parallelograms, located on the left-hand list. For more information
and practice on working with quadrilaterals, reference the book Geom-
etry Success in 20 Minutes a Day, published by LearningExpress.
THE PARTS OF A CIRCLE
Circles are another common plane figure.
GLOSSARY
CIRCLE the set of all points equidistant from one given point, called the center. The
center point defines the circle, but is not on the circle.
CHORD a line segment whose endpoints are on the circle. In the above figure, there
and
are two chords shown: AB DE.
DIAMETER of a circle is a chord that passes through the center of the circle. A diam-
. The diameter is twice the radius of the circle.
eter is shown in the circle above as AB
This is represented by d = 2r. All diameters in a circle are congruent; they have equal
measure.
RADIUS of a circle is the line segment whose one endpoint is at the center of the cir-
cle and whose other endpoint is on the circle. A radius is shown in the circle above as
or OB
AO . The radius is one-half the length of the diameter. This is represented by
1

r = 2 d. All radii in a circle are congruent; they have equal measure.
TANGENT to a circle is a line that intersects the circle in exactly one point
TANGENT SEGMENT a part of the tangent whose one endpoint is the point on the
circle
SECANT a line that intersects the circle in two points. A secant contains a chord of
the circle.
SECANT SEGMENT a segment that extends in one direction beyond the circle, but
contains the two points on the circle. One of the points on the circle is the endpoint of
the secant segment.
ARC of a circle is a piece of the circle. Arc length can be measured in degrees. The
sum of the measures of the arc sections that form the circle adds up to 360°.
Example:
In the figure below of circle O, what is the length of
AB?
All radii in a circle are congruent. Use algebra to find the value of
the variable x. Then, find the length of the diameter, AB.
12x 36
12
x=3
Use the value of x = 3 to find the length of
AB: 16x + 4x + 36 =
20x + 36 = (20 3) + 36 = 60 + 36 = 96.
Sometimes, problems are presented in which the angle or arc measures

are described as a ratio. In these types of problems, show the measures as
the ratio factor times a variable.
Example:
In a given circle, the arc measures AB, BC, CD, DA are in the ratio
of 2 : 3 : 3 : 4. What is the measure of each of the arcs?
The sum of the degree measure of all of the arcs in a circle is 360°.
Assign a variable, like x, and express each arc measure as a variable
times the ratio factor. Use algebra to solve for x, and then find the
measure of the arcs.
2x + 3x + 3x + 4x = 360 Set up an equation.
12x 360
12 2
x = 30
Now use the value of 30 to find the measure of each of the arcs:
AB = 2x = 2 30 = 60°, BC = CD = 3x = 3 30 = 90° each, and
DA = 4x = 4 30 = 120°.
ANGLES AND ARCS RELATED TO CIRCLES

AND THEIR MEASURE
GLOSSARY
CENTRAL ANGLE an angle whose vertex is the center of the circle. The sum of the
measures of the central angles that form the circle adds up to 360°.
INSCRIBED ANGLE an angle whose vertex is on the circle, and whose sides pass
through two other points on the circle
INTERCEPTED ARC an arc contained in the interior of an angle
RULE BOOK
E The measure of the central angle in a circle is equal to the measure of

the intercepted arc.
The measure of an inscribed angle in a circle is equal to one-half the
measure of the intercepted arc.
SHORTCUT
" A central angle of 180° is a diameter of the circle; it divides the circle
in half.
Perpendicular radii form a central angle of 90°; they divide the circle
to form a quarter circle.
Example:
+
Given the following circle, what is the measure of AB?
The measure of the intercepted arc is equal to the measure of the

+ = 60° because ∠BOA = 60°.
central angle that intercepts that arc. AB
Example:
In the following circle, what is the value of the variable x?
The measure of an inscribed angle is one-half the measure of the arc

that it intercepts. The angle is 67°. Use this fact and algebra to find
the value of x:
3x 60
3
x = 20
There are also angles formed by tangents, secants, and chords of a cir-
cle. Angles formed by secant and tangent segments have a vertex in the exte-
rior of the circle. These angles intercept the circle in two places; there are
two intercepted arcs. Angles formed by two chords have a vertex in the inte-
rior of the circle. The angle and its vertical pair intercept the circle in two
places; there are two intercepted arcs.
There are rules that govern the measure of these angles.
RULE BOOK
E Two secant segments, two tangent segments, or a tangent and a

secant form an angle exterior to the circle. The measure of this angle
is one-half of the difference between the intercepted arcs of the angle.
1
m ∠APB = 2(y – x)
Example:
The following figure is a circle with tangent and secant shown.
AC
+ = 120°. What is
is a diameter of the circle, and the measure of CB
the measure of ∠APC?
Because AC is a diameter, the measure of AC + = 180°. This is one of

the intercepted arcs. The other intercepted arc is AB. + The measure
of all of the arcs in a circle is equal to 360°, so the measure of
+ = 360 – 180 – 120 = 60°. The measure of ∠APC = 12(180 – 60) =
AB
1 120
(120) = 2 = 60°.
2
Example:
+ is
Below is a circle with two tangents as shown. The measure of AB
110°. What is the measure of ∠APB?
The measure of the arcs around a circle sum up to 360°, so the

measure of arc ACB = 360 – 110 = 250°. The two arcs, ACB and AB,
are the intercepted arcs. Use the formula to calculate the measure of
∠APB:
1 1 140
measure of ∠APB = 2(250 – 110) = 2(140) = 2 = 70°
RULE BOOK
E A pair of vertical angles is formed by the intersection of two chords of

a circle. The measure of either of these angles is equal to one-half of
the sum of the intercepted arcs of the angles.
Example:
Using the following circle, determine the measure of ∠AOD.
+ and BC.
The two intercepted arcs are AD + Use the formula to calcu-
1
late the angle measure. The measure of ∠AOD = 2(90 + 60) =
1 150
(150) = 2 = 75°.
2
SEGMENT MEASURES AS RELATED TO CIRCLES
Just as there are rules concerning the angles related to the circle, there are
also rules that govern the segments formed by secant and tangent segments
and chords.
RULE BOOK
E Two tangent segments to a circle that share a common endpoint are

congruent; they have the same measure.
Example:
In the following graphic of a circle with two tangents shown, what is
?
the length of tangent AP
A
7x
10
x–
30
The tangent segments are congruent; the measures are equal. Use
algebra to solve for the value of x, and then find the length of tan-
gent
AP:
10x – 30 = 7x Set up an equation.
10x – 30 – 7x = 7x – 7x Subtract 7x from both sides.

3x 30
3
x = 10
AP = 7x = 7 10 = 70.
A secant to a circle has a portion of its segment in the interior of the

circle (a chord of the circle), and a portion in the exterior of the cir-
cle, which will be called the outer piece.
RULE BOOK
E When two secants intersect in the exterior of a circle, the product of the
measure of the outer piece and the entire secant segment is equal to
the product of the corresponding pieces of the other segment. This is
easier to show with a diagram and labels.
b
a
b(a + b) = d(c + d)
When a secant and a tangent segment intersect in the exterior of a cir-
cle, the product of the measure of the outer piece and the entire secant
segment is equal to the square of the tangent segment.
2
a = b(b + c)
Example:
Given the following circle with secants shown, what is the value of
chord
AB?
The product of the outer piece times the whole segment of one
secant is equal to the product of the corresponding pieces of the
other secant. Use algebra to solve for x:
12(x + 12) = (18 10) Set up an equation.
12x + (12 12) = (18 10) Use the distributive property.
12x + 144 = 180 Multiply.
12x 36
12
x=3 This is the value of
AB.
Example:
In the following circle with tangent and secant shown, what is the
?
length of AP
The square of the tangent measure is equal to the product of the

outer piece and the whole secant segment. Use algebra to find the
value of the variable x, and then use this value to find the length of

AP:
4x + (4 4) = 82 Use the distributive property.
4x + 16 = 64 Multiply.
4x 48
= 4 Divide both sides by 4
4
x = 12
AP = 12 + 4 = 16.
CALCULATOR TIPS
i Locate the “square” key and the square root key on your calculator.
They will be helpful when working with the tangent segment meas-
urement problems. The keys will look similar to the following graphic.
Often, the square root function is the second function that corre-
sponds to the “square” key.
RULE BOOK
E When two chords of a circle intersect, the product of the measures of

the two segments of one chord equals the product of the measures of
the segments of the other chord.
Example:
?
In the circle below, what is the length of AO
For the two intersecting chords, the product of the measures of the
two segments of one chord equals the product of the measures of
the two segments of the other chord. Use algebra and solve for x;
find the length of
AO:
3x 8 = 12 4 Set up an equation.
24x = 48 Multiply.
24x 48
24
x=2
AO = 3x = 3 2 = 6.
EXTRA HELP
O The website http://library.thinkquest.org/20991/geo/index.html has a
lesson on circle relationships. Upon reaching this site, click on Circles,
located on the left-hand list. Follow the tutorial and take the quiz.
TIPS AND STRATEGIES
When solving problems related to quadrilaterals and circles, remember:
• Quadrilaterals are classified according to the Venn diagram shown

in this chapter.
• The sum of the measure of the angles in a quadrilateral is 360°.
• The sum of the measure of the exterior angles in a quadrilateral is
360°.
• The sum of the measure of any two consecutive angles in a paral-
lelogram is 180°.
• Opposite sides and opposite angles in a parallelogram are congruent.

• In an isosceles trapezoid, the base angles and the sides that are not
the bases are congruent.
• Know the facts about the diagonals of quadrilaterals as shown in the
chart in this chapter.
• Be familiar with circle vocabulary.
• The measure of a central angle in a circle is equal to the measure
of the intercepted arc.
• The measure of an inscribed angle in a circle is equal to one-half of
the measure of the intercepted arc.
• Be familiar with the rules for finding other angles and segment
lengths dealing with chords, secants, and tangents of a circle.
PRACTICE QUIZ
1. Which of the following statements is ALWAYS true?

a. The diagonals of all parallelograms are congruent.
b. All rectangles are squares.
c. All trapezoids have two congruent sides.
d. All squares are rhombuses.
e. All parallelograms have a 90° angle.
2. In the following parallelogram ABCD, what is the measure of ∠ADC?
a. 145°
b. 65°
c. 325°
d. 165°
e. 45°
3. Given rectangle WXYZ below, what is the length of

WZ?
a. 11
b. 9
c. 35
d. 30
e. 70
= 3x + 17 and
4. In square ABCD, if BD AC = 7x – 23, what is the value
of the variable x?
a. 10
b. 47
c. 7
3
d. 2
e. 38
5. Given isosceles trapezoid PQRS, what is the measure of ∠QPS?
a. 100°
b. 70°
c. 45°
d. 20°
e. 50°
?
6. In parallelogram WXYZ, what is the length of WC
= 20,
XC WY = 10x, and
CZ = 2x + 8
a. 20
b. 30
c. 50
d. 15
e. 60
7. Which statement below is FALSE?

a. A rhombus has four congruent sides.
b. A rhombus is a parallelogram.
c. The diagonals of a rhombus bisect each other.
d. The diagonals of a rhombus are perpendicular.
e. All rhombuses have 90° angles.
8. Given trapezoid GHIJ, what is the value of the variable x?
a. 24°
b. 75°
c. 60°
d. 12°
e. 120°
9. The following figure is parallelogram ABCD with exterior angles

shown. What is the measure of ∠BAD?
a. 50°
b. 150°
c. 130°
d. 30°
e. 80°
10. What is the value of the variable x in the following rhombus RSTU?
a. 20
b. 2
c. 2.8
d. 4
e. 4.4
?
11. In isosceles trapezoid LMNO, what is the length of MN
a. 37
b. 18
c. 16.5
d. 15
e. 34
12. Which of the following statements is true for rectangle JKLM?
≅ KM
a. JL
.
b. KM bisects JL
≅ KJ
c. LM
d. Choices a, b, and c are all true.
13. Use the diagram to determine which of the following is FALSE.
a.
OQ ≅ OP
b. x = 4
= 12
c. QP
d.
QP = 10x – 16
= 12
e. OP
14. What is the measure of ∠MOP?
a. 34.5°
b. 17°
c. 67°
d. 113°
e. 134°
15. What is the measure of ∠BAC?
a. 80°
b. 40°
c. 100°
d. 10°
e. 20°
16. Given that

WY is a diameter of the following circle, what is the meas-
+
ure of WX?
a. 140°
b. 180°
c. 20°
d. 160°
e. 200°
17. In the following circle, the ratio of arcs BC : BA : AC is 2 : 4 : 6. What

+
is the measure of BA?
a. 60°
b. 40°
c. 120°
d. 240°
e. 20°
18. Use the following circle to find the measure of ∠AOD.
a. 100°
b. 10°
c. 40°
d. 80°
e. 90°
19. Use the following circle with tangents shown to find the measure of
∠APB.
a. 50°
b. 120°
c. 240°
d. 130°
e. 65°
is a diameter of circle O below, what is the measure of

20. Given that AB
∠BPC?
a. 70°
b. 20°
c. 80°
d. 60°
e. 35°
21. In the following circle with two secants shown, what is the measure
of ∠BPC?
a. 25°
b. 20°
c. 45°
d. 50°
e. 10°
22. What is the value of the variable x shown below in the circle with two
tangents?
a. 25
b. 12.5
c. 625
d. 5
e. 50
23. What is the length of secant

AP in the following circle?
a. 4.4
b. 24
c. 2.4
d. 2
e. 14.4
?
24. In the circle with two chords shown below, what is the length of OB
a. 2
b. 12
c. 4
d. 8
e. 6
?
25. In the circle with two secants shown below, what is the length of AP
a. 20
b. 16
c. 10
d. 6
e. 12
ANSWERS
Here are the answers, with detailed explanations, for all the practice prob-
lems. Study the explanations for any problems that you answered incor-
rectly. Then, go back and try those problems again. Refer back to the
chapter for further study if needed.
1. d. All squares are rhombuses; a rhombus has four congruent sides. If

the diagonals of a parallelogram are congruent, then it is a rectan-
gle; this is not true for every parallelogram. Only some rectangles
are squares. Some trapezoids, but not all, have two congruent sides.
Rectangles are the only type of parallelogram that have 90° angles.
2. a. The measure of any two consecutive angles in a parallelogram add

up to 180°. The measure of the angle is 180 – 35 = 145°.
3. c. Opposite sides of a rectangle are congruent. Use algebra to find

the value of the variable x, then find the length of
WZ:
18 2x

2 = 2 Divide both sides by 2.
9=x
= 5x – 10 = (5 9) – 10 = 45 – 10 = 35
WZ
4. a. The diagonals of a square are congruent; this is true for any rec-
tangle. Use algebra to find the value of x:
40 4x
4
10 = x
5. e. In an isosceles trapezoid, the base angles are congruent. In addi-

tion, the sum of the measure of the angles in a trapezoid is 360°.
The measure of the sum of the base angles is 360 – 130 – 130 =
100°. The measure of ∠QPS is one-half of 100°, which is 50°.
6. b. The diagonals of a parallelogram bisect each other. The two

smaller segments of each diagonal are therefore congruent. Use
this fact to find the value of the variable x:
2x 12
2
x=6
, 10x = 10 6 = 60. The
Use this value to find the length of WY
, so it is 30.
length of WC is one-half of the length of WY
7. e. Only some rhombuses have 90° angles, that is, those that are
squares. Statements a through d are always true of every rhombus.
8. d. The sum of the measure of the angles in a trapezoid is 360°.

There are two 90° angles, as shown by the small box written in
the angles. Use algebra to solve for x:
10x + 5x + 90 + 90 = 360 Set up an equation.
15x 180
15 5
x = 12
9. a. Any exterior angle and its adjacent interior angle form a linear
pair. From the figure, the measure of ∠ADC = 180 – 50 = 130°.
Any two consecutive interior angles of a parallelogram add up to
180. The measure of ∠BAD = 180 – 130 = 50°.
10. b. All of the sides of a rhombus are congruent. Use algebra to solve
for x:
10x 20
10
x=2
11. e. In an isosceles trapezoid, the sides that are not bases are congru-
ent. These are the sides marked as expressions. Use algebra to
solve for x, and then find the length of
MN.
2x + 4 = x + 19 Set up an equation.
2x + 4 – x = x + 19 – x Subtract x from both sides.
x + 4 = 19 Combine like terms.
x + 4 – 4 = 19 – 4 Subtract 4 from both sides
x = 15
= x + 19 = 15 + 19
Use the value of 15 to find the length of MN
= 34.
12. d. Choices a, b, and c are true. The diagonals of a rectangle are con-
gruent. The diagonals of a rectangle bisect each other. Opposite
sides of a rectangle are congruent.
13. c. Use the fact that all radii in a circle are congruent. Statement a is
therefore true. After finding the value of x, determine which of
the other statements is false.
4x 16
4
x=4
= 3x + 7x – 16 = 10x – 16; QP
QP = (10 4) – 16 = 40 – 16 = 24.
Statement c is false.
14. c. The measure of a central angle is equal to the measure of the arc
it intercepts.
15. b. The measure of an inscribed angle is equal to one-half the meas-

ure of the arc it intercepts. The measure of ∠BAC = 80 ÷ 2 = 40°.
16. a. The measure of the arc that intercepts a diameter is 180°. The
+ is 180°. The measure of XY
measure of WY + is 40°; it is twice the
measure of the inscribed angle that it intercepts. The measure of
+ = WY – XY, or 180 – 40 = 140°.
WX
17. c. The sum of the measures of the three arcs in the circle is equal to
the degree measure of the circle, which is 360°. Use algebra to
assign the arc measures as 2x, 4x, and 6x, respectively, and then
+
solve for x. Find the measure of BA.
12x 360
12 2
x = 30
Use the value of 30 to find the measure of arc BA = 4x = 4 30 =
120°.
18. e. The measure of an interior angle formed by the intersection of

two chords is one-half of the sum of the measure of the two arcs
80 180
that the chords intercept. The measure of ∠AOD = 100 + 2 = 2
= 90°.
19. a. The measure of the exterior angle formed by two tangents is one-
half of the difference between the outer arc and the inner arc
intercepted by the two tangents. The outer arc is the degree
measure of the circle minus the measure of the inner arc; 360 –
130 100
130 = 230°. The measure of ∠APB = 230 – 2 = 2 = 50°.
20. b. The measure of the exterior angle formed by a tangent and a

secant is one-half of the difference between the outer arc and the
inner arc intercepted by these segments. Because AB is a diame-
+ +
ter, AB = 180°; the measure of AC = 180 – 70 = 110°. The measure
70 40
of ∠BPC = 110 – 2 = 2 = 20°.
21. b. The measure of the exterior angle formed by two tangents is one-
half of the difference between the outer arc and the inner arc
50
intercepted by the two tangents. The measure of ∠BPC = 90 – 2
40
= 2 = 20°.
22. d. The lengths of tangents to a circle are congruent. Use algebra to

solve for x:
5x = x + 20 Set up an equation.
5x – x = x + 20 – x Subtract x from both sides.
4x 20
4
x=5
23. e. The measure of a secant and a tangent to a circle are related by

the fact that the square of the tangent measure is equal to the
product of the outer piece and the whole piece of the secant. Use
algebra to solve for x:
10x + (10 10) = 122 Use the distributive property.
10x + 100 = 144 Multiply.
10x = 44
10x 44
10
x = 4.4
= x + 10 = 4.4 + 10 = 14.4.
The length of AP
24. c. Multiply the two segments of one chord together. This value is
equal to the product of the two segments of the other chord
shown. Use algebra and assign the missing segment length to the
variable x. Solve for x, and this will be the length of
OB.
12x = 8 6 Set up an equation.
12x = 48 Multiply.
12x 48
12
x=4 .
This is the length of OB
25. b. For the two secants shown, the lengths are in the relationship of
(outer piece) times (whole segment) = (outer piece) times (whole
segment). Use algebra to find the value of x, and then find the
length of
AP.
10(x + 10) = 8(2x + 8) Set up an equation.
10x + (10 10) = 16x + (8 8) Use the distributive property.
10x + 100 = 16x + 64 Multiply.
10x + 100 – 10x = 16x + 64 – 10x Subtract 10x from both sides.
36 6x
6
6=x
Use the value of 6 to find the length of

AP = x + 10 = 6 + 10 = 16.
6
Perimeter and Area
T he word geometry means “measure of the earth.” We constantly

measure things in real life. We measure for fences and carpets; we
measure fabric and wallpaper. A basic understanding of geometry is cru-
cial to success on your upcoming test. Take this short benchmark quiz to
see how much of your studies should be concentrated on this chapter.
BENCHMARK QUIZ
1. Find the area.
a. 15 cm2
b. 25 cm2
c. 60 cm2
d. 50 cm2
e. 30 cm2
167
2. Find the perimeter.
a. 10.2 ft
b. 23.6 ft
c. 20.4 ft
d. 43.2 ft
e. 15 ft
3. Find the area.
a. 5π in2
b. 100π in2
c. 25π in2
d. 100 in2
e. 25 in2
P E R I M ETE R AN D AR EA 169
4. Find the area.
a. 96 m2
b. 60 m2
c. 120 m2
d. 80 m2
e. 960 m2
5. Find the circumference.
a. 16 mm
b. 8π mm
c. 64π mm
d. 256π mm
e. 16π mm
6. Find the perimeter of the isosceles triangle.
a. 72 mm
b. 320 mm
c. 40 mm
d. 136 mm
e. 120 mm
7. Find the area of the shaded region.
a. 96 cm2
b. 48 cm2
c. 120 cm2
d. 24 cm2
e. 144 cm2
8. Find the area.
a. 192 m2
b. 120 m2
c. 80 m2
d. 52 m2
e. 130 m2
9. Find the area of the irregular figure. Use 3.14 for π.
a. 391.86 in2
b. 853.44 in2
c. 545.72 in2
d. 314.93 in2
e. 281.96 in2
10. Find the area of the shaded region. Use 3.14 for π.
a. 64 cm2
b. 114.24 cm2
c. 13.76 cm2
d. 137.6 cm2
e. 50.24 cm2
1
1. a. The area of a triangle is A = 2bh, where A stands for area, b stands
for the base length, and h stands for the height—the length of the
segment that is perpendicular to the base. In this triangle, the
1
base is 10 cm and the height is 3 cm. A = 2 10 3 and multi-
plying them all together yields an area of 15 cm2.
2. b. To find perimeter, you add up all the lengths of the sides of the
polygon. The perimeter is 7.4 + 6 + 2.2 + 8 = 23.6 ft.
3. c. The area of a circle is A = πr2, where π is a constant, and r is the

radius of the circle. The problem gives the diameter to be 10
inches. The radius, 5 inches, is one-half of the length of the diam-
eter. Using the formula, A = π 5 5, so the area is 25π in2.
4. a. Opposite sides of a rectangle are congruent. Use this fact and

algebra to solve for the variable x. Then, find the length of the
side of the rectangle. Multiply this by the side of length 12 to get
the area:
x – 5 = 112 – 8x Set up an equation.
x – 5 + 8x = 112 – 8x + 8x Add 8x to both sides.
9x 117
9
x = 13
Use this value to find the side of the rectangle: x – 5 = 13 – 5

= 8 m. The area is 8 12 = 96 m2.
5. e. Circumference is found by the formula C = πd, where C is the cir-

cumference, π is a constant and d is the diameter. The radius of 8
mm is given, and diameter is twice the radius. The diameter is 16
mm; C = 16π mm.
6. d. This is an isosceles triangle; the two sides marked as algebraic

expressions are congruent. Use algebra to find the value of x.
Then, find the length of these congruent sides. Add up all the
sides to find the perimeter.

4x 24
4 4
x=6
Use this value to find the length of the congruent sides: 8x =
8 6 = 48 mm. The perimeter is 48 + 48 + 40 = 136 mm.
7. b. The area of the shaded region is the area of the outer figure, a rec-
tangle, minus the area of the inner figure, a triangle; A = Arectangle –
1
Atriangle. Using the area formulas, you get A = bh – 2bh; A =
1
(12 8) – 2(12 8) = 96 – 48 = 48 cm2.
1
8. e. The area of a trapezoid is A = 2h(b1 + b2), where A stands for area,
b1 and b2 are the lengths of the parallel bases, and h is the height—
the length of the segment perpendicular to the bases. In this
trapezoid, the height = 10 m, since it is perpendicular to the bases.
The bases are the parallel sides, 16 m and 10 m. Substitute the
1
given information into the formula: A = 2 10 (16 + 10) to get
1
A = 2 10 (26). Multiply all terms on the right together to
yield an area of 130 m2.
9. d. This figure is a rectangle and one-half of a circle. The area will be

A = Arectangle + (Acircle divided by 2); A = bh + πr2 ÷ 2. The radius is
one-half of the width of the rectangle; the radius is 7; A =
(14 17) + (3.14 72) ÷ 2 = 238 + 76.93 = 314.93 in2.
10. c. The area of the shaded region is found by taking the area of the
outer figure, the square, and subtracting out the area of the inner
figure, the circle. A = Asquare – Acircle. Using the area formulas, you
get A = s2 – πr2. Notice that the diameter of the circle is the same
length as the side of the square. So, the radius is one-half of 8. The
radius is 4 cm. Substitute in the given lengths and value of π to get
A = 8 8 – 3.14 4 4. Using the order of operations, you mul-
tiply first, from left to right; A = 64 – 50.24, or A = 13.76 cm2.
If you answered 8–10 questions correctly, you have a good understanding

of area and perimeter. Perhaps the questions you answered incorrectly deal
with one specific area in this chapter. Read over the chapter, concentrating
on those areas of weakness. Proceed to the Practice Quiz to try to improve

your score.
If you answered 4–7 questions correctly, there are several areas you need
to review. Carefully read through the lesson in this chapter for review and
skill-building. Work carefully through the examples and pay attention to
the sidebars that refer you to definitions, hints, and shortcuts. Get addi-
tional practice on geometry by visiting the suggested websites and taking
the quiz at the end of the chapter.
If you answered 1–3 questions correctly, you need to spend some time on
the topics in this chapter. First, carefully read this chapter and concentrate
on the sidebars and visual aids that will help with comprehension. Go to the
suggested websites in the Extra Help sidebar in this chapter, which will help
with understanding and will provide extended practice. You may also want
to refer to Geometry Success in 20 Minutes a Day, Lessons 12, 13, and 16,
published by LearningExpress.
JUST IN TIME LESSON—PERIMETER AND AREA
There are many applications of geometry in mathematical problems. This

chapter will describe ways that geometry is used for measurement.
The topics in this chapter are:
• Perimeter of Polygons
• Area of Common Polygons
• Perimeter and Area of a Circle
• Area of Irregular Shaped Figures
• Area of Shaded Regions
PERIMETER OF POLYGONS
Perimeter is the measure AROUND a polygon. Perimeter is an addition

concept; it is a linear, one-dimensional measurement.
RULE BOOK
E To find the perimeter of a polygon, add up all of the lengths of the

sides of the figure. Be sure to name the units.
Example:
Find the perimeter.
Add up the lengths of all sides, that is AB, BC, and AC. The height,
3 mm, is information that is not needed to calculate the perimeter.
Substitute in to get 6 + 4 + 5 = 15 mm.
SHORTCUT
" In a rectangle, like all parallelograms, the opposite sides are parallel
and congruent. Perimeter can be found using the formula P = 2l + 2w,
where P is the perimeter, l is the length, and w is the width.
For a square, or any rhombus, the perimeter can be found by P =
4s, where P is the perimeter and s is the length of one of the sides.
Example:
Find the perimeter of the rectangle.
In a rectangle, like all parallelograms, the opposite sides are parallel

and congruent. In this example, AB ≅ DC. Use algebra to solve for
the variable x.
4x 22
4
x = 5.5
Use this value to find the length of

AB and
DC ; 3x + 18 = (3 5.5)
+ 18 = 34.5. Use the shortcut for the perimeter of a rectangle: P =
(2 34.5) + (2 27.3) = 69 + 54.6 = 123.6 inches.
Be alert when working with geometry problems to make sure that

the units are consistent. If they are different, a conversion must be
made before calculating perimeter or area.
Example:
Find the perimeter of the trapezoid.
Change the lengths of the sides given in feet to be inches; 1 ft =

12 in; BC = 2 ft = 24 in, and AD = 5 ft = 60 in. Now add up the four
sides: 24 + 60 + 30 + 26 = 140 in.
AREA OF COMMON POLYGONS
Area is a measure of how many square units it takes to COVER a closed fig-
ure. Area is measured in square units. Area is a multiplication concept,
where two measures are multiplied together. You can also think of units
being multiplied together: cm cm = cm2, or the words centimeters squared.
There are formulas to use for the area of common polygons:
RULE BOOK—COMMON POLYGON
E FORMULAS
A stands for area, b stands for base, h stands for height (which is
perpendicular to the base), and b1 and b2 are the parallel sides of a
trapezoid.
1
Area of a triangle A = 2bh
Area of a parallelogram A = bh
1
Area of a trapezoid A = 2h(b1 + b2)
Be sure to include square units in your answer.

Recall that rectangles, squares, and rhombuses are parallelograms. For

rectangles and squares, the height is also a side of the polygon.
Example:
Find the area of the triangle.
Note that the height must be perpendicular to the base, so the

height is 10.2 mm and the base is 18 mm.
1
A = 2bh Substitute in the given
information.
1
A = 2 18 10.2 Multiply the terms on the right
together.
A = 91.8 Include the square units.
A = 91.8 mm2
CALCULATOR TIPS
i When calculating areas, the calculator may help. If you have a fraction
key on your calculator, use it when calculating the area of a triangle.
The key strokes are shown below to calculate the area of the triangle
1
in the above example: A = 2 18 10.2
Example:
Find the area of the parallelogram.
Because the figure is a parallelogram, the height is the length that is

perpendicular to the base, not a side of the figure. The base is 300
cm, and the height is 1.5 m. Before using the area formula, all units
need to be consistent. Change 300 cm into meters before proceed-
ing. There are 100 centimeters in a meter; therefore, there are 300
divided by 100 meters, which is 3 meters in the base.
A = bh Use the area formula and substitute in the
given lengths.
A = 1.5 3 Multiply the base times the height.
A = 4.5 Include the square units.
A = 4.5 m2
SHORTCUT
" The area of a square is A = s2, where s is a side of the square.
PERIMETER AND AREA OF A CIRCLE
RULE BOOK
E CIRCUMFERENCE of a circle is the distance AROUND the circle (the

perimeter).
C = πd, where π is a constant, and d is the length of the diameter.

OR
C = 2πr, where r is the length of the radius.
AREA of a circle is the number of square units it takes to cover the

circle.
A = πr2, where π is a constant and r is the radius.
PI, π, is a special ratio that is a constant value of approximately 3.14.

C
Pi compares circumference to diameter in the following ratio: π = d. It
is the same value for every circle. Often, in math tests, answers will be
given in terms of π, such as 136π square units. If answers are not given
in terms of π, use the π key on your calculator unless otherwise
instructed. Sometimes, a problem will direct you to use either π = 3.14,
22
or π = 7, which are approximations for pi.
CALCULATOR TIPS
i Many calculators have a special key for the constant pi, which is more
22
accurate than using either π = 3.14, or π = 7. Other calculators have
the constant as a second function, or shift function. In this case, look
for the π symbol printed above one of the keys. Usually, the key looks
like one of the following:
Using the formulas above, you can calculate the circumference and
area of circles. Take care and check if the problem gives the radius or
diameter. If the problem asks for the area of the circle, for example,
and gives the length of the diameter, you must first calculate the
length of the radius. The radius can be found by dividing the diame-
ter by two. Just like for all area calculations, the units will be square
units. The units for circumference will be linear (single) units.
Example:
Find the area of the circle.
The problem gives the diameter, which is 20.6 meters. The first step
is to calculate the radius.
1
r = 2 d Substitute in 20.6 for d.
r = 10.3 m Now, use the formula for the area of
a circle.
A = πr2 Substitute in for the radius.
A = π 10.3 10.3 Multiply 10.3 times 10.3, and include
the square units.
A = 106.09π m2
Frequently, answers are left in terms of π, as in this example. Take care

on multiple-choice tests. Sometimes the answer choices will look similar;
one will be in terms of π, and another will omit the π constant.
Example 2:
Given that the circumference of a circle is C ≈ 106.76 feet, find the
radius. Use π = 3.14.
C = πd Substitute in for C and π.
106.76 = 3.14 3 d Divide 106.76 by 3.14 to find
diameter.
34 = d To find the radius, use the radius
formula.
1
r = 2d Substitute in the diameter.
1
r = 2 34 Multiply one-half times 34, and
include units.
r = 17 ft
AREA OF IRREGULAR SHAPED FIGURES
Some problems ask for the area of an irregular shaped polygon. The key to
solving these types of problems is to break the figure up into polygons that
you recognize, such as a triangle, rectangle, or circle. Often, pieces of cir-
cles are part of the irregular figure.
Example:
Find the area to the nearest hundredth.
Notice that this figure is a triangle with one-half of a circle on the

1
top. The area is A = Atriangle + 2Acircle. The base of the triangle is
equal to the diameter of the circle, so the radius of the circle is one
half the base of the triangle. The radius is 9. Substitute in the

1 1
known formulas: (2 18 22) + 2 π 92. Multiply first and
then add to get 198 + 127.23 = 325.23 m2.
Example:
Find the area of the figure. Use 3.14 for π.
This figure is actually a square; with two half circles on either end.
The two half circles are congruent, and together they form a whole
circle. The radius of the circle is one-half of the side of the square,
and one-half of 46 is 23 mm. A = Asquare + Acircle. Substitute in the for-
mulas: A = s2 + πr2. A = (46 46) + (3.14 23 23). Multiply first,
and then add to get the area. A = 2,116 + 1,661.06 = 3,777.06 mm2.
Example:
Find the perimeter of the above shape.
In this case, the perimeter will be two sides of the square, plus the
circumference of one whole circle; P = 46 + 46 + πd; P = 92 +
(3.14 46); P = 92 + 144.44 = 236.44 mm.
AREA OF SHADED REGIONS
Often on math tests, you are asked to find the area of a shaded region, such
as these:
To solve this type of problem, you identify the figures in the diagram.
There is an outer figure and an inner figure. The area of the shaded region
will be Areaouter figure minus the Areainner figure.
In Figure I, the outer figure is a circle with a radius of 8 inches, and the
inner figure is a circle with a radius of 2 inches. To find the area of the
shaded region, perform the following:
Ashaded = Aouter – Ainner Substitute in the correct formulas.
Ashaded = πr2 – πr2 Now, substitute in the radius
lengths.
Ashaded = (π 8 8) – (π 2 2) Order of operations directs
multiplication to be done next,
left to right. Answer will be left
in terms of π.
Ashaded = 64π – 4π Now, combine the π terms, and
include square units.
Ashaded = 60π in2
In Figure II, the outer figure is a rectangle and the inner figure is a tri-
angle. The height of both the rectangle and the triangle is 14 cm. The base
of the rectangle is 17 cm and the base of the triangle is 12 cm.
Ashaded = Aouter – Ainner Substitute in the correct formulas.

1
Ashaded = bh – 2bh Substitute in the given lengths.
1
Ashaded = (17 14) – (2 12 14) Multiplication is done next,
working left to right.
Ashaded = 238 – 84 Now evaluate the subtraction,
and include the units.
Ashaded = 154 cm2
EXTRA HELP
O If you feel you need extended help in working with area and perime-
ter, Geometry Success in 20 Minutes a Day, published by LearningEx-
press, has several lessons devoted to this topic.
There are several useful web sites that deal with area and perime-
ter. Visit these sites if you need further clarification on these concepts.
Each one has a unique method of presentation.
1. The website www.math.com has extensive lessons on geometry.

Once at the site, click on Geometry, which you will find on the left
under Select Subject. From this page, select any topic of interest.
Each topic has a lesson, followed by an interactive quiz. Answers to
all quizzes are provided.
2. The website www.aaamath.com is another good resource for

practice with geometry. Once on the home page, click on Geometry.
You will find this on the right under Math Topics. The topics are well
organized, and there is a brief description of the topic followed by
an interactive quiz. Answers are provided.
3. A third site to visit is http://rock.uwc.edu/galexand/baw/toc.htm.
You will see the heading Table of Contents on the left. Click on Les-
son #10, Geometric Figures. Again, there is a lesson followed by a
quiz with answers provided.
TIPS AND STRATEGIES
• Perimeter is a linear measurement that measures the length around

a plane figure.
• Area is a square measurement that measures how many square units
it takes to cover a figure.
• Be careful of unit consistency when solving problems of area and
perimeter.
• Circles can be measured for circumference and area.
• Know the formulas for the area of a circle and common polygons.
• Calculate the area of irregular-shaped figures by breaking them up
into smaller figures that are recognizable.
• Calculate the area of a shaded region by subtraction:
Ashaded = Aouter – Ainner.
PRACTICE QUIZ
1. Find the area.
a. 160 in2
b. 46 in2
c. 120 in2
d. 288 in2
e. 240 in2
a. 165 cm
b. 60 cm
c. 68.5 cm
d. 137 cm
e. 120 cm
a. 52 in
b. 42 in
c. 31 ft
d. 3.1 ft
e. 50 in
4. Find the area.
a. 36 mm2
b. 48 mm2
c. 22 mm2
d. 64 mm2
e. 60 mm2
5. Find the area.
a. 24 in2
b. 40 in2
c. 72 in2
d. 144 in2
e. 52 in2
a. 1,520 cm
b. 1,520 m
c. 265 cm
d. 265 m
e. 1,300 cm
7. Find the area.
a. 900π mm2
b. 60 mm2
c. 225π mm2
d. 900 mm2
e. 225 mm2
8. Find the perimeter of the equilateral triangle.
a. 28 cm
b. 56 cm
c. 84 cm
d. 80 cm
e. 336 cm
9. Given the circumference of a circle is 24π inches, find the radius of

the circle.
a. 6 in
b. 6π in
c. 12 in
d. 12π in
e. 24 in
10. Find the circumference.
a. 6 cm
b. 6π cm
c. 18π cm
d. 9π cm
e. 36π cm
11. Find the area of the square.
a. 8 m2
b. 32 m2
c. 64 m2
d. 128 m2
e. 1,024 m2
12. Given the area of the rectangle = 90 cm2, find the length of
AB.
a. 15 cm
b. 11.25 cm
c. 18 cm
d. 2.5 cm
e. 8 cm
a. 28.5 in
b. 67 in
c. 64 in
d. 55 in
e. 46 in
14. Find the area of the rectangle.
a. 748 mm2
b. 88 mm2
c. 112 mm2
d. 56 mm2
e. 52 mm2
15. Find the area of the figure to the nearest hundredth.
a. 180 cm2
b. 236.55 cm2
c. 293.10 cm2
d. 632.29 cm2
e. 406.19 cm2
a. 400 in2
b. 714.16 in2
c. 462.83 in2
d. 635.62 in2
e. 478.54 in2
17. Find the area of the shaded region. Use 3.14 for π.
a. 45.76 in2
b. 105.06 in2
c. 70.87 in2
d. 146.27 in2
e. 297.06 in2
a. 58π cm2
b. π cm2
c. 7π cm2
d. 25π cm2
e. 40π cm2
a. 54.24 ft2
b. 111.97 ft2
c. 73.48 ft2
d. 108.48 ft2
e. 146.97 ft2
20. Find the area of the figure.
a. 31.5 cm2
b. 28.5 cm2
c. 34.5 cm2
d. 33 cm2
e. 39 cm2
a. 49 in2
b. 69 in2
c. 29 in2
d. 80 in2
e. 9 in2
22. Find the perimeter. Use π = 3.14.
a. 53.98 mm
b. 107.98 mm
c. 185.94 mm
d. 59.96 mm
e. 75.96 mm
23. The radius of the circle in the figure below is 5 cm. Find the area of
the shaded region.
a. 157 cm2
b. 28.5 cm2
c. 47.1 cm2
d. 53.5 cm2
e. 103.5 cm2
24. Find the area of the figure.
a. 93 in2
b. 34.5 in2
c. 28 in2
d. 75 in2
e. 57 in2
a. (200π – 100) cm2

b. (100π – 100) cm2
c. (40π – 200) cm2
d. (100π – 200) cm2
e. (200π – 200) cm2
ANSWERS
1. e. The area of a parallelogram is A = bh, where b is the base and h is

the height. The side measurement of 12 inches is not needed to
solve this problem. Substitute in the values for the base and
height: A = 24 10 = 240 square inches.
2. d. The perimeter is the sum of the measure of the sides of a polygon;

30 + 30 + 40 + 37 = 137 cm.
3. b. The perimeter is the sum of the measure of the sides of a polygon.

One of the sides is given as feet, and the other two sides are given
as inches. Convert 1 foot to 12 inches; 20 + 10 + 12 = 42 inches.
1
4. b. The area of a trapezoid is A = 2h(b1 + b2), where h is the height and
b1 and b2 are the parallel bases. For this trapezoid, the height is
also the side perpendicular to the parallel bases. Substitute in to
1
get: A = 2 6 (6 + 10) = 3 16 = 48 mm2.
1
5. c. The area of a triangle is A = 2bh, where b is the base and h is the
1
height. Substitute in to get: A = 2 12 12 = 6 12 = 72 square
inches.
6. a. The units must be consistent before solving. Change 5 meters to

500 cm. This is a rectangle, so use the shortcut formula: P = 2l + 2w.
Substitute in to get: (2 260) + (2 500) = 520 + 1,000 = 1,520 cm.
Note that choice b has units of meters, which is incorrect.
7. c. The area of a circle is A = πr2. This problem gives the diameter.

The radius is one-half of the diameter. One-half of 30 is 15 mm.
Substitute in to get: A = π 152 = 225π square millimeters. Note
that choice e is just 225 mm2, which is incorrect.
8. c. An equilateral triangle has all three sides congruent, of equal

measure. Use algebra to find the value of the variable x. Find the
length of one of the sides and multiply by three:
x + 18 = 4x –12 Set up an equation.
x + 18 – x = 4x – 12 – x Subtract x from both sides.
30 3x
3
10 = x
Use the value of 10 to find the length of side x + 18: 10 + 18 =

28 cm. The perimeter is 3 28 = 84 cm.
9. c. The radius is one-half of the diameter of a circle. Since the for-

mula for circumference is C = πd, the diameter is 24 inches. One-
half of 24 equals 12, so the radius is 12 inches.
10. e. The circumference is C = πd, where d is the diameter of the circle.

Two radii are shown, and all radii are congruent in a circle. Use
algebra to solve for the variable x, to find the diameter, then solve
for the circumference:
3x = x + 12 Set up the equation.
2x 12
2
x=6
Use the value of 6 to find the diameter, which is two times a
radius: 2(3x) = 2 (3 6) = 2 18 = 36. The circumference is
36π cm.
11. e. A square has all four sides of equal measure. Use algebra to find
the value of x, and then use the shortcut for the area of a square,
A = s2.
8x – 32 = 3x + 8 Set up the equation.
5x 40
5
x=8
Use the value of 8 to find the length of one of the sides of the
square: 3x + 8 = (3 8) + 8 = 24 + 8 = 32 meters. The area is 322
= 1,024 m2.
12. b. The area is given as 90 cm2, and the formula for the area is A = bh.
Use algebra to solve for the variable x, and then use this value to
find the length of
AB.
90 = 8(6x + 3) Set up the equation.
90 = (8 6x) + 24 Use the distributive property.
66 48x
48 8
1.375 = x
: 6x + 3 = (6 1.375) + 3 =
Use this value to find the length of AB
8.25 + 3 = 11.25 cm.
13. b. To find the perimeter, add up the measure of the sides. First make
all units consistent. All of the answer choices are inches, so convert
the feet measurements to inches by multiplying by 12: 2 feet =
24 inches, and 1.5 feet = 18 inches. Perimeter is 24 + 18 + 10 + 15 =
67 inches.
14. a. The area of a rectangle is A = bh. The opposite sides of a rectangle

are equal measure, so use algebra to find the variable of x:
7x + 6 = 11x – 10 Set up the equation.
16 4x
4
4=x
Use this value to find the length of the longer sides: 7x + 6 =
(7 4) + 6 = 28 + 6 = 34 mm. Now, calculate the area = 34 22 =
748 mm2.
15. b. This irregular figure is a rectangle and one-half of a circle. The

side of the rectangle, which is also the diameter of the circle, is 12
cm. The radius is one half the measure of the diameter so the
radius is 6 cm; Airregular figure = Arectangle + A12 circle. The answer calls for
the value to the nearest hundredth and does not specify what
value to use for π. Use the π key on the calculator. Substitute in
1 1
the formulas and then the values: A = bh + 2πr2 = (15 12) + 2π62
= 180 + (18 π) = 180 + 56.55 = 236.55 square centimeters.
16. d. This irregular figure is a square with sides of 20 inches, and three
fourths of a circle with radius of 10 inches. Add up the two pieces
3
to get the total area; A = s2 + 4πr2. Substitute in the values to get:
3 3
202 + 4π102. Use the π key to solve: 400 + 4 100 π = 400 +
235.62 = 635.62 in2.
17. a. The shaded region is Ashaded = Aouter – Ainner. The outer shape is a
rectangle and the inner shape is a circle. The radius of the circle is
one-half the height of the rectangle, or one half of 8, which is 4
inches; A = bh – πr2. Substitute in to get A = (12 8) – (3.14 42)
or 96 – 50.24 = 45.76 square inches.
18. e. The area of the shaded region is Ashaded = Aouter – Ainner. Two seg-
ment lengths are given. One is the radius of the inner circle, the
other measure, 4 cm, is the distance from the inner circle to the
outer circle. The outer figure is actually a circle with a radius of 7
and the inner figure is a circle with a radius of 3. All of the answer
choices are left in terms of π; A = πr2 – πr2. Substitute in to get: A
= 72π – 32π = 49π – 9π = 40π cm2.
19. a. This irregular figure is a right triangle, with base of 10 and height
1 1
of 7, and a half circle with radius of 3.5; A = 2bh + 2πr2; A =
1 1
210 7) + ( 2 π 3.5 ). Use your calculator, and the π key, to get:
( 2
A = 35 + 19.24 = 54.24 ft2.
20. c. This figure is a right triangle and a rectangle. The rectangle has
base of 4 and height of 6. The triangle has base of 3 plus the base
of the rectangle (3 + 4 = 7) and height of 3. Substitute these values
1 1
into the formulas: A = bh + 2bh = (4 6) + 2(7 3). Simplify to
get: 24 + 10.5 = 34.5 cm2.
21. c. The area of the shaded region is Ashaded = Aouter – Ainner. The outer
figure is a rectangle and the inner figure is a trapezoid. The rec-
tangle has a base of 5 and a height of 9.8. The trapezoid has a
height of 5 and the bases are 5 and 3. Substitute in to get: A =
1
(9.8 5) – 25 (5 + 3). Simplify to get: 49 – 20 = 29 in2.
22. e. The perimeter of this irregular shaped figure is the sum of the
two sides of the rectangle (length 16 mm), and the circumference
of two one-half circles with a diameter of 14 mm. Since it is two
one-half identical circles, it will just be the circumference of one
circle with diameter of 14 mm; P = 16 + 16 + πd = 32 + 3.14 14
= 32 + 43.96 = 75.96 mm.
23. d. The area of the shaded region is Ashaded = Aouter – Ainner. The outer
figure is a circle with a radius of 5 cm. The inner figure is a trian-
gle. The base of the triangle is a diameter of the circle; the base is
a chord that passes through the center of the circle. The base is 10
cm, which is twice the radius, and the height is 5 cm, the radius of
1 1
the circle; A = πr2 – 2bh = (π 52) – (2 10 5). Simplify to get
78.5 – 25 = 53.5 cm2.
24. a. The area of this irregular figure is the sum of the areas of two
identical triangles, plus the area of the middle section, a rectangle.
The triangles have a base of 9 in and a height of 8 in. The rectan-
1
gle has a base of 7 in and a height of 3 in; A = (2 (2 9 8)) +
(7 3). This simplifies to 72 + 21 = 93 square inches.
25. d. The area of the shaded region is Ashaded = Aouter – Ainner. The outer
figure is a circle, and the inner figure is a rectangle. The base and
height of the rectangle are not given, so treat this rectangle as two
triangles, where the base is the diagonal of the rectangle, which
happens to be the diameter of the circle. The radius is given as 10
cm, so the base of the triangles is 20 cm. The height of the triangles
is the radius, 10 cm. Substitute these values in to get: A = π102 –
1 1
2(2 bh). Simplify to get: 100π – (2 2 200), or (100π – 200) cm2.
7
Surface Area
and Volume
C hapter 6 reviewed the concepts of measurement in two dimen-
sions. This chapter concentrates on the three-dimensional meas-
ures of surface area and volume. Take this ten-question benchmark quiz
to assess your current knowledge of these concepts.
BENCHMARK QUIZ
1. How many edges does this rectangular prism have?
a. 9
b. 12
c. 6
d. 8
e. 11 201
2. Find the surface area of the triangular prism.
a. 360 in2
b. 468 in2
c. 342 in2
d. 300 in2
e. 324 in2
3. Find the volume of the trapezoidal prism.
a. 2,520 in3
b. 2,800 in3
c. 63 in3
d. 6,400 in3
e. 5,040 in3
S U R FA C E A R EA A N D VO LU M E 203
4. Find the surface area.
a. 1,250 mm2
b. 1,100 mm2
c. 850 mm2
d. 1,000 mm2
e. 2,500 mm2
5. Find the surface area.
a. 704π m2
b. 704 m2
c. 768 m2
d. 656 m2
e. 768π m2
6. The base of the triangular prism is an isosceles right triangle. Find the
volume.
a. 20,250 cm3
b. 40,500 cm3
c. 342 cm3
d. 450 cm3
e. 144 cm3
7. Find the surface area of a sphere whose diameter is 14 meters.

a. 14π m2
b. 49π m2
c. 196π m2
d. 784π m2
e. 49 m2
8. The volume of the cylinder is 384π in3. Find the value of the variable x.
a. 19.2 in
b. 3 in
c. 6 in
d. 21.5 in
e. 43 in
9. Find the volume of the sphere.
64π
a. in3
3
b. 64π in3
128π
c. in3
3
d. 256π in3
256π
e. 3 in3
10. Find the volume of the cone.
a. 360π ft3
b. 30π ft3
c. 60π ft3
d. 120π ft3
e. 90π ft3
1. b. The edges are the segments that make up the solid. There are 12
segments: four on the top, four on the bottom, and four that make
up the sides.
2. d. Surface area is found by calculating the area of each face, and then
adding these areas together. There are two bases that are triangles
of equal measure, and three rectangular faces. The area of each
1 1
triangle is A = 2bh, or A = 2 6 6 = 18 in2. Since this is an
isosceles triangle, there are two congruent rectangular faces. The
area of each is A = bh, or A = 12 8 = 96 in2. The bottom face is
A = bh, or A = 12 6 = 72 in2. Surface area is 18 + 18 + 96 + 96 +
72 = 300 in2.
3. a. Volume of a prism is found by V = Bh, where B is the area of the

1
base. In this prism, the base is a trapezoid; V = 2h1(b1 + b2 ) h2 .
1
Substitute in the values for the heights and bases: V = 2 7(20 +
1
16) 20, V = 2 7(36) 20 = 2,520 in3.
4. c. The surface area of a rectangular prism can be found by using the

formula SA = 2(l w) + 2(l h) + 2(w h). Substitute in the val-
ues for length, width, and height to get: 2(25 5) + 2(25 10) +
2(5 10) = 2(125) + 2(250) + 2(50) = 250 + 500 + 100 = 850 mm2.
5. e. Use the formula for the surface area of a cylinder: SA = 2(πr2) +

2πrh. Substitute in 8 for r, the radius, and 40 for h, the height; SA
= 2(π82) + 2π 8 40. Evaluate the exponent: 2(π64) + 2π 8
40. Perform multiplication: 128π + 640π. Combine like terms to
get the surface area of 768π m2. Be careful; choice c is 768 m2,
which is incorrect.
6. a. The base is a right isosceles triangle. The base and height have
equal measure. Use this fact and algebra to find the value of the
variable x. Evaluate the length of the dimensions using this value,
and then calculate the volume.
2x = x + 15 Set up an equation.
x = 15
The base of the triangle, b, is 2 times 15, or 30 cm. The height of
the triangle, h1, is also 30 cm. The height of the prism, h2, is 3
1
times 15, or 45 cm. Use the formula V = 2bh1 h2. Substitute in
1
the measures: V = 2 30 30 45. Multiply to get 20,250 cm3.
7. c. The surface area of a sphere is SA = 4πr2. The diameter is given in

the problem. The radius is one half the length of the diameter, or
7 meters; SA = 4 π 72 = 4(49)π, or 196π square meters.
8. b. Use the formula for the volume of a cylinder and an algebraic

equation to find the value of the variable x. The volume of a cylin-
der is V = πr2h.
π(82)(2x) = 384π Set up an equation.
π(128x) = 384π Multiply.
128πx 384π
= Divide both sides by 128π.
128π 128π
x=3
4
9. e. Use the formula for the volume of a sphere: V = 3πr3. This sphere
4 4
has a radius of 4 inches; V = 3π43 =
3 π 64. Multiply to get
256π
in3.
3
1
10. d. The volume of a cone is V = 3πr2h, where r is the radius of the
base, and h is the height of the cone. Substitute in the values for
1 1
radius and height; V = 3π62 10. Evaluate the exponent: V = 3π
36 10 and multiply to get 120π ft3.
If you answered 8–10 questions correctly, you have remembered a great

deal about surface area and volume. If the questions you answered incor-
rectly are centered on one specific area in this chapter, take your time on
that section in the chapter. Read over the remainder of the text to pick up
any shortcuts or techniques for solving problems. Then, proceed to the
Practice Quiz to try to improve your score.
If you answered 4–7 questions correctly, there are several concepts you
need to review. Carefully read through the lesson in this chapter for review
and skill building. Work carefully through the examples and pay attention
to the sidebars that refer you to definitions, hints, and shortcuts. Get addi-
tional practice on geometry by visiting the suggested websites and taking
the quiz at the end of the chapter.
If you answered 1–3 questions correctly, carefully read this chapter and
concentrate on the sidebars and visual aids that will help with comprehen-
sion. Work through each example in the text on paper to be sure you can
solve it. Go to the suggested websites in the Extra Help sidebar in this chap-
ter, which will help with understanding and will provide extended practice.
Refer to Geometry Success in 20 Minutes a Day, published by LearningExpress.
This book has lessons 14, 15, and 16 that cover these concepts.

SURFACE AREA AND VOLUME
There are many applications of geometry in mathematical problems. This

chapter will review three-dimensional solid figures. Surface area is a cover-
ing or wrapping concept and volume is a filling concept.
• Three-dimensional Figures: Faces, Vertices, and Edges

• Surface Area of Prisms
• Surface Area of Cylinders and Spheres
• Volume of Prisms
• Volume of Cylinders and Spheres
• Volume of Pyramids and Cones
THREE-DIMENSIONAL FIGURES:
FACES, VERTICES, AND EDGES
Solid figures are three-dimensional entities. Polyhedrons are solids whose
surfaces are made up of polygons. The parts of a polyhedron are defined as
faces, vertices, and edges.
GLOSSARY
FACE of a polyhedron is one of the plane surfaces on the solid
EDGE of a polyhedron is one of the segments on the solid
VERTEX of a polyhedron is an intersecting point of any two edges of the solid
Some common solid figures are defined below.
GLOSSARY
PRISM a three dimensional solid that has two congruent faces called bases. The other
faces are rectangles.
RECTANGULAR PRISM a prism that has bases that are rectangles

CUBE a rectangular prism with six congruent faces that are squares
TRIANGULAR PRISM a prism that has bases that are triangles

TRAPEZOIDAL PRISM a prism that has bases that are trapezoids
CYLINDER is a solid in which the bases are circles and the other surface is a rectangle
wrapped around the circles
SPHERE a solid in which all of the points on the sphere are an equal distance from a
center point. This distance is the radius of the sphere.
RECTANGULAR PYRAMID a solid that has a rectangle for a base, and four triangu-
lar faces that meet at a vertex opposite to the base
CONE a solid that has a circle for a base, with the other face wrapping around this
base and meeting opposite the base at a vertex point
SURFACE AREA OF PRISMS
Surface area is the number of square units that it takes to cover a three
dimensional solid. To calculate surface area, first determine the number of
faces on the prism. Calculate the area of each face and then add them
together. The formulas for the area of the faces were covered in Chapter 6.
Example:
Find the surface area of the prism.
This is a trapezoidal prism; the parallel faces are trapezoids. There

are six faces: two congruent trapezoids, and four rectangles. The
1 1
area of each trapezoid is A = 2h(b1 + b2), or A = 2 2 (7 + 4) = 11.
The area of the bottom rectangle is A = bh, or A = 7 6 = 42. The

area of the top face is A = 4 6 = 24. The area of the left face is A =
5 6 = 30, and the area of the right face is A = 3 6 = 18. Add
these six areas together to get the surface area: SA = 11 + 11 + 42 +
24 + 30 + 18 = 136 mm2.
Example:
The surface area of the triangular prism shown is 242.4 in2. The tri-
angular base is an equilateral triangle. What is the length of
BC?
Use the variable x to represent the length of BC. The area of the
1 1
two triangular bases is A = 2 bh, or A = 2 6 4.4 = 13.2. There

are three other rectangular faces. Each of these is congruent because
the triangular base is equilateral. The area of each rectangle is A =
bh, or A = 6x. Use algebra to find the value of the variable x, the
length of
BC:
242.4 = 13.2 + 13.2 + 3(6x) Set up the equation.
242.4 = 26.4 + 18x Multiply, and then combine like
terms.
242.4 – 26.4 = 26.4 + 18x – 26.4 Subtract 26.4 from both sides.
216 18x
18 8
12 = x This is the length of
BC.
SHORTCUT
" For prisms, there is a pair of parallel congruent bases. Calculate the
area of one of these bases and then multiply by 2. For rectangular
prisms, there are two other sets of congruent faces. These facts lead
to the formulas commonly used for rectangular prisms:
SURFACE AREA OF A RECTANGULAR PRISM:

SA = 2(l w) + 2(l h) + 2(w h)
where w is the width, l is the length, and h is the height of the prism
SURFACE AREA OF A CUBE:

SA = 6s2
where s is the length of a side of the cube
Example:
The surface area of a cube is 384 ft2. What is the length of an edge
of the cube?
384 = 6s2 Use the formula to set up an equation.
384 6s2
6 6
64
= s2 Take the square root of each side.
8=s
Each edge of the cube measures 8 feet.
Be alert when working with geometry problems to make sure that the
units are consistent. If they are different, a conversion must be made before
calculating surface area.
Example:
What is the surface area of the following rectangular prism?
The length is 2.5 feet, the width is 6 inches, and the height is 10
inches. Convert the length to inches (1 foot = 12 inches). The
length is 12 2.5 = 30 inches. Now use the shortcut formula:
SA = 2(30 6) + 2(30 10) + 2(6 10)
SA = 2(180) + 2(300) + 2(60) Evaluate parentheses.
SA = 360 + 600 + 120 Perform multiplication.
SA = 1,080 in2 Perform addition; include units.
When there is a variable present given as one of the dimensions, an alge-

braic equation is used to either solve for the variable, or to find a measure-
ment. Pay attention to what the problem is asking for; sometimes the value
of the variable is needed, other times the actual measurement is requested.
Example:
The triangular base of the following prism is an isosceles triangle.
Find the surface area of the prism.
Since the triangle is isosceles, the sides marked as algebraic expres-

sions have equal measure. Use algebra to solve for the variable x.
Evaluate to find the length of these sides. Then, calculate surface
area.
6x 60
6
x=1
1
The area of the triangle is A = 2 90 50 = 2,250 mm2. The con-
gruent sides of the triangle are 7x = 7(10) = 70 mm2. Two of the rec-
tangular faces are A = 70 100 = 7,000 mm2. The other face is A =
90 100 = 9,000 mm2. Add these areas to find the surface area: SA =
2(2,250) + 2(7,000) + 9,000 = 4,500 + 14,000 + 9,000 = 27,500 mm2.
Example:
The surface area of the rectangular prism is 652 cm2. Find the value
of the variable x.
Use the shortcut formula and algebra to find the value of x:

652 = 2(8x) + 2(22x) + 2(8 22)
652 = 16x + 44x + 352 Perform multiplication.
300 60x
60 0
5=x
SURFACE AREA OF CYLINDERS AND SPHERES
A cylinder has two congruent bases that are circles, and one long rectan-
gular piece that wraps to form the side.
The side marked h is the height of the cylinder. The side marked c is the cir-
cumference of the circular base, calculated by the diameter of the circular base.
RULE BOOK
E The surface area of a cylinder is the two times the area of one of the
circular bases, plus the circumference of the circular base, times the
height of the cylinder:
SURFACE AREA OF A CYLINDER

SA = 2(πr2) + 2πrh
The surface area of a sphere is based on the radius of the sphere:
SURFACE AREA OF A SPHERE

SA = 4πr2
Using the preceding formulas, you can calculate the surface area of cylin-
ders and spheres. Take care and check if the problem gives the radius or
diameter. If the problem asks for the surface area of a cylinder, for exam-
ple, and gives the length of the diameter, you must first calculate the length
of the radius. The radius can be found by dividing the diameter by 2. Just
like for all area calculations, the units will be square units.
Example:
Find the surface area of the following cylinder. Use 3.14 for π.
Note that the units are not consistent. Convert the height from
meters to centimeters by multiplying by 100: 0.5 100 = 50 cm.
Use the formula for surface area, substituting 16 for r and 50 for h:
SA = 2(π162) + 2π 16 50.
Evaluate exponents: 2(256π) + 2π 16 50.
Perform multiplication: 512π + 1,600π.
Combine like terms: SA = 2,112π cm2.
Use the value of 3.14 for π to get the surface area: 2,112 3.14 =
6,631.68 cm2.
Example:
The surface area of the following cylinder is 384π square units.
What is the value of the variable x?
Use the formula and algebra:

2(π16x2) + 2π(4x)(8x) = 384π Set up the equation.
32πx2 + 64πx2 = 384π Perform multiplication.
96πx2 = 384π Combine like terms.
96πx2 384π
96π 96π
x2 = 4
Simplify; take the square root of
each side.
x=2
Example:
Find the surface area of a sphere with a diameter of 6 inches.
The diameter is given. Calculate the radius, which is one-half the
diameter. The radius is 3 inches. Use the formula A = 4πr2; A =
4 π 32 = 36π in2.
Frequently, answers are left in terms of π, as in this example. Take care

on multiple-choice tests. Sometimes the answer choices will look similar;
one will be in terms of π, and another will omit the π constant.
VOLUME OF PRISMS
Volume is a measure of how many cubic units it takes to FILL a solid fig-
ure. Volume is measured in cubic units. Volume is a multiplication concept,
where three measures are multiplied together. The units can also be
thought of as multiplied together: cm cm cm = cm3, or the words
“centimeters cubed.” There are formulas to use for the volume of common
solid figures.
RULE BOOK
E Volume is the area of the base of the solid figure, multiplied by the
height of the figure. This can be expressed as V = Bh, where V is the
volume, B is the area of the base, and h is the height of the prism. The
formulas for the area of these base shapes were covered in Chapter
6 of this book.
VOLUME OF A RECTANGULAR PRISM: V = lwh
In this case, B = lw, (the base is a rectangle), where l is the length, and
w is the width.
VOLUME OF A CUBE: V = s3
In this case, B = s2, and the height is also s.
1
VOLUME OF A TRIANGULAR PRISM: V = 2bh1 h2
1
In this case, B = 2bh1, where b is the base of the triangle, and h1 is the
height of the triangle. The variable h2 is the height of the prism.
1
VOLUME OF A TRAPEZOIDAL PRISM: V = 2h1 (b1 + b2) h2
In this case, B = 12h1 (b1 + b2), where h1 is the height of the trapezoid
and b1 and b2 are the parallel bases of the trapezoid. The variable h2
is the height of the prism.
Example:
Given the volume of a rectangular prism is 766.48 mm3, find the
height if the length is 6.7 mm and the width is 11 mm.
Use the formula for the volume of a rectangular prism:
V = lwh Substitute in the given information.
766.48 = 6.7 11 h Multiply 6.7 times 11.
766.48 = 73.7 h Divide 766.48 by 73.7 and include
units.
10.4 mm = h The units are linear (single) because
this is a height measurement.
Example:
Find the volume of the trapezoidal prism.
Use the formula, substituting in the measurements:

1
V = 2h1(b1 + b2) h2.
1
V = 2 5(12 + 4) 14.2.
1
Evaluate parentheses: 2 5(16) 14.2.
Multiply left to right to find the volume. The volume is 568 cm3.
CALCULATOR TIPS
i If your calculator has the fraction key and parentheses keys, the cal-
culator will most likely perform the correct order of operations. This is
especially helpful when finding the surface area or volume of trape-
zoidal and triangular prisms. Follow the keystrokes below to verify if
your calculator follows the order of operations. The example key-
strokes are for the previous example. Verify that your calculator shows
the correct answer of 568.
VOLUME OF CYLINDERS AND SPHERES
RULE BOOK
E Volume is the area of the base of the solid figure, multiplied by the
height of the figure. This can be expressed as V = Bh, where V is the
volume, B is the area of the base and h is the height of the prism.
VOLUME OF A CYLINDER: V = πr2h
In this case, B = πr2, where π is the constant, and r is the radius of the
circular base.
4
VOLUME OF A SPHERE: V = 3πr3
The volume of a sphere is based on the radius of the sphere.

Example:
Find the volume of a cylinder whose base diameter is 14.8 inches
and has a height of 18 inches.
First, recognize that while the diameter is given, the radius is
needed to calculate volume. Use the formula to find the radius:
1
r = 2d Substitute in the given value for
diameter.
1
r = 2 14.8 Multiply one-half times 14.8.
r = 7.4 in Now use the formula for the volume of
a cylinder.
V = πr2h Substitute in the given information.
V = π 7.4 7.4 18 Multiply all the number terms together
on the right.
V = 985.68π Include the cubic units.
V = 985.68π in3
Example:
Find the volume of a sphere with radius of 12 mm. Use 3.14 for π.
4 4
Use the formula V = 3πr3 and substitute in 12 for r; V = 3π123. Eval-
4
uate the exponent first: 3π 1,728. Multiply to get 2,304π cm3. Use
the value of 3.14 for π to find the volume: 7,234.56 cm3.
VOLUME OF PYRAMIDS AND CONES
The volume of a pyramid is based on the formula for the volume of a rec-
tangular prism. The volume of a cone is based on the formula for the vol-
ume of a cylinder.
RULE BOOK
E VOLUME OF A PYRAMID: V = 3Bh

1
In this case, B is the area of the base, and h is the height of the pyra-
1
mid. For a rectangular pyramid, the formula is V = 3 lwh.
1
VOLUME OF A CONE: V = 3πr2h
In this case, B is the area of the circular base, and h is the height of
the cone.
Example:
The height and the diameter of a cone are both 24 inches. Find the
volume of the cone to the nearest hundredth.
1
Use the formula for the volume of a cone: V = 3πr2h. The radius is
one-half the measure of the diameter; the radius is 12 inches. Use
1
the π key on the calculator since no value for π is given; V = 3 π
1
(12)2 24 = 3 π 144 24 = 1,152 π. Multiply using the π
key and round to the hundredths place to get 3,619.11 in3.
Example:
The volume of the following rectangular pyramid is 508.8 m3. Find
the height of the pyramid.
Represent the height of the pyramid as x. Use the formula for the vol-
ume of a pyramid and your knowledge of algebra to find the height;
1
V = 3 Bh. The length and width are 8 and 12.
1

3 8 12 x = 508.8 Set up the equation.
32x = 508.8 Perform multiplication.
32x 508.8
= 3 Divide both sides by 32 and include
32 2
units.
x = 15.9 m The height has linear units, meters.
EXTRA HELP
O If you need extended help in working with surface area and volume,
Geometry Success in 20 Minutes a Day, published by LearningExpress,
has several lessons devoted to this topic: Lesson 14, Lesson 15, and
Lesson 16.
There are useful web sites that deal with these topics of geometry.
Visit these sites if you feel you need further clarification on these con-
cepts. Each has a unique method of presentation.
1. The website www.math.com has extensive lessons on geometry.

Once at the site, click on Geometry, which you will find on the left
under Select Subject. From this page, select Space Figures. Each
topic has a lesson, followed by an interactive quiz. Answers to all
quizzes are provided.
2. The website www.aaamath.com is another good resource for
practice. Once on the home page, click on Geometry. You will find
this on the right under Math Topics. Scroll down to select either sur-
face area or volume on the right side of the page. The topics are well
organized, and there is a brief description of the topic followed by
an interactive quiz. Answers are provided.
TIPS AND STRATEGIES
• Familiarize yourself with the common, three-dimensional solids:

prism, cylinder, sphere, pyramid, and cone.
• The face of a prism is one of the plane surfaces of the prism.
• The edge of a prism is any one of the segments of the prism.
• A vertex of a prism is where any two edges meet at a point.
• Surface area is the amount of square units it takes to cover or wrap
a three-dimensional solid.
• Surface area is measured in square units.
• Volume is a cubic measurement that measures how many cubic
units it takes to fill a solid figure.
• Know the volume formulas for the common solid figures.
• The volume of a cone is one-third the volume of a cylinder with the
same base and height.
• The volume of a rectangular pyramid is one-third the volume of a
rectangular prism with the same base and height.
PRACTICE QUIZ
Use this figure for questions 1 and 2.
1. How many edges does this solid have?

a. 9
b. 12
c. 6
d. 8
e. 5
2. How many faces does this solid have?

a. 6
b. 4
c. 2
d. 3
e. 5
3. How many vertices does the following solid figure have?
a. 8
b. 6
c. 7
d. 12
e. 9
4. Find the surface area of the prism.
a. 216 cm2
b. 252 cm2
c. 126 cm2
d. 288 cm2
e. 432 cm2
5. Find the surface area of a cylinder whose diameter is 16 mm and

height is 16 mm.
a. 384 mm2
b. 320 mm2
c. 1,024 mm2
d. 64π mm2
e. 384π mm2
6. Find the surface area of the sphere.
a. 9π in2
b. 144π in2
c. 36π in2
d. 27π in2
e. 12π in2
7. Find the volume of the solid.
a. 900 in3
b. 720 in3
c. 592 in3
d. 512 in3
e. 300 in3
8. If the volume of the triangular prism is 48 cm3, what is the value of

the variable x?
a. 0.8 cm
b. 6 cm
c. 1 cm
d. 2 cm
e. 0.5 cm
9. What is the length of a side of a cube whose volume is 27 cm3?

a. 9 cm
b. 3 cm
c. 10 cm
d. 2.7 cm
e. 8 cm
10. What is the volume of a cylinder with a height of 100 cm and a radius
of 5 m?
a. 1,000 m3
b. 10π m3
c. 2,500π m3
d. 1,000π m3
e. 25π m3
11. Find the volume of a sphere with a diameter of 18 ft.

a. 72 ft3
b. 729π ft3
c. 243π ft3
d. 972π ft3
e. 1,944π ft3
12. Find the volume of the pyramid.
a. 360 ft3
b. 360π ft3
c. 120 ft3
d. 120π ft3
e. 180 ft3
13. Find the surface area of the cube.
a. 2,400 in2
b. 64 in2
c. 400 in2
d. 726 in2
e. 1,331 in2
14. Find the surface area of this cylinder where the height is 13 mm.
a. 2(144π) + 24 π 13 mm2
b. 2(24π) + 2 π 13 mm2
c. 144π + 24 π 13 mm2
d. 156π mm2
e. 1,872π mm2
15. Find the surface area of the rectangular prism.
a. 280 cm2
b. 1,600 cm2
c. 160 cm2
d. 240 cm2
e. 192 cm2
16. Find the volume.
a. 624 mm3
b. 672 mm3
c. 840 mm3
d. 8,064 mm3
e. 576 mm3
17. If the volume of the triangular prism is 3,990 in3, find the height.
a. 63.4 inches
b. 30 inches
c. 28.7 inches
d. 15 inches
e. 36 inches
18. The volume of a cube is 512 cm3. What is the value of the variable x,
if the length of each side is 2x cm long?
a. 6 cm
b. 85.3 cm
c. 64 cm
d. 4 cm
e. 8 cm
19. What is the surface area of a sphere with a radius of 6 mm?

a. 36π mm2
b. 144π mm2
c. 48π mm2
d. 12π mm2
e. 288π mm2
20. Find the volume of the cylinder shown when the height is represented
as 16x cm.
a. 6,912π cm3
b. 1,152π cm3
c. 432π cm3
d. 96π cm3
e. 256π cm3
32π
21. If the volume of a sphere is 3 m3, what is the diameter of the sphere?
a. 16 m
b. 4 m
c. 2 m
d. 8 m
e. 5.66 m
22. The surface area of a cylinder is 182π in2. What is the height of the
cylinder, if the diameter is 14 inches?
a. 12 inches
b. 9.5 inches
c. 1 inch
d. 11 inches
e. 6 inches
23. Find the volume of the following cone. The height is 16 mm.
a. 2,304 mm3
b. 768 mm3
c. 768π mm3
d. 2,304π mm3
e. 96π mm3
24. The pyramid has a height of 28 cm. Find the volume to the nearest
hundredth.
a. 30,464 cm3
b. 10,154.67 cm3
c. 3,384.89 cm3
d. 31.33 cm3
e. 372 cm3
25. Find the volume of the following cone whose height is represented as
3x inches. Use 3.14 for π.
a. 9,408 in3
b. 3,136 in3
c. 29,541.12 in3
d. 9,847.04 in3
e. 703.36 in3
ANSWERS
1. d. There are eight edges, which are the segments of the solid. There
are four in the base and four on the sides.
2. e. There are five faces, which are the polygons of the solid. There is
one rectangular base and four triangular faces.
3. a. There are eight vertices, the points where the segments meet, on
this solid.
4. b. Use the shortcut formula for the surface area of a rectangular

prism: SA = 2(l w) + 2(l h) + 2(w h); SA = 2(12 3) + 2(12
6) + 2(3 6). Evaluate parentheses to get 2(36) + 2(72) + 2(18).
Multiply: 72 + 144 + 36. Finally, add the measures to get the sur-
face area of 252 square centimeters.
5. e. The diameter is given. First calculate the radius as one-half of the

diameter. The radius is 8 mm. Use the formula for the surface
area of a cylinder: SA = 2(πr2) + 2πrh. Substitute in the values: SA
= 2(π82) + 2π 8 16. Multiply to get 128π + 256π. Add these
like terms to get 384π mm2.
6. c. Use the formula for the surface area of a sphere: SA = 4πr2. Sub-
stitute in for the radius to get SA = 4π32, or 36π square inches.
7. b. Volume is the area of the base, a trapezoid, times the height,

1
which is 18 inches. The volume of a trapezoidal prism is V = 2h1
1
(b1 + b2) h2. Substitute in the values from the drawing: V = 2
1
5(10 + 6) 18. Evaluate parentheses: V = 2 5(16) 18. Multi-
ply to get 720 cubic inches.
1
8. d. Use the formula for the volume, V = 2bh1 h2, and algebra to find
the value of the variable x:
1

2 3x 4 4 = 48 Substitute in the values.
24x = 48 Simplify the left-hand side: multiply.
24x 48
24
x=2
9. b. The volume of a cube is given by the formula V = s3, where s is the

side of a cube. The length of a side of the cube will be the cube
root of 27, which is 3, because 3 3 3 = 27.
10. e. First, note that the units are not consistent. Change 100 cm to 1
meter. Use the formula for the volume of a cylinder: V = πr2h,
where r is the radius and h is the height. Substitute in to get V = π
52 1 = 25π cubic meters.
4
11. d. Use the formula for the volume of a sphere: V = 3πr3. The diam-
eter is given. Divide this measure by 2 to find the radius. The
4
radius is 9 feet. Substitute into the formula to get V = 3π93. Eval-
4
uate the exponent: V = 3π 729. Multiply to get the volume of
972π cubic feet.
1
12. c. Use the formula for the volume of a pyramid: V = 3lwh. Substitute
1
in the values from the diagram to get V = 3 6 6 10. Multi-
ply to get 120 cubic feet.
13. a. In a cube, all the sides have equal measure. Use this fact and alge-
bra to find the value of the variable x, then find the length of a side.
6x – 46 = 4x – 24 Set up an equation.
6x – 46 – 4x = 4x – 24 – 4x Subtract 4x from both sides.
2x – 46 = –24 Combine like terms.
2x – 46 + 46 = –24 + 46 Add 46 to both sides.
2x 22
2
x = 11
Use this value to find the length of a side: 6x – 46 = 6(11) – 46 =
66 – 46 = 20 inches. Surface area is SA = 6s2, or 6 times 202. This
is 6 times 400, or 2,400 square inches.
14. a. Use the formula for the surface area of a cylinder: SA = 2(πr2) +
2πrh. Substitute in the values to get 2(π 122) + 2π12 13. This
is equivalent to 2(144π) + 24π 13 square millimeters.
15. e. In a rectangle, the opposite sides have equal measure. Use this
fact and algebra to find the value of the variable x, and then calcu-
late the surface area.
x=2 Combine like terms.
Because x = 2, the length is 5 times 2, or 10 centimeters, and the
width and height are 2 times 2, or 4 centimeters. Use the formula
for the surface area of a rectangular prism: SA = 2(10 4) + 2(10
4) + 2(4 4). Evaluate parentheses: 2(40) + 2(40) + 2(16). Mul-
tiply to get 80 + 80 + 32 = 192 square centimeters.
1
16. c. Use the formula for the volume of a trapezoidal prism, V = 2h1(b1
1
+ b2) h2. Substitute in the values from the diagram to get: V = 2
1
6(12 + 8) 14. Evaluate parentheses: V = 2 6(20) 14.
Now, multiply to get 840 cubic millimeters.
17. b. Use the formula for the volume of a triangular prism and algebra
to find the value of the variable x. Use this value to find the height.
1
3,990 = 2bh1 h2
1
3,990 = 2 19 14 (2x + 6) Substitute in the values.
3,990 = 133(2x + 6) Simplify the right side by
multiplying.
3,990 = 266x + 133(6) Use the distributive property.
3,990 = 266x + 798 Multiply.
3,990 – 798 = 266x + 798 – 798 Subtract 798 from both sides.
3,192 = 266x Combine like terms.
3,192 266x
266 266
12 = x
The height is 2x + 6 = 2(12) + 6 = 30 inches.
18. d. If each side of the cube is 2x cm long, use this value and algebra to
find the value of the variable; V = s3.
512 = (2x)3 Substitute in the value.
512 = 8x3 Evaluate the exponent.
512 8x3
8
3 3
= x3
64 Take the cube root of each side.
4=x 4 times 4 times 4 equals 64.
19. b. Use the formula SA = 4πr2. Substitute in the radius: SA = 4π(62).

Evaluate the exponent: SA = 4π(36) = 144π square millimeters.
20. a. All radii in a circle have the same measure. Use this fact and algebra
to find the value of the variable x. Then, use the formula for
volume.
10x – 18 = 4x Set up the equation.
6x 18
6
x=3
Because x = 3, the radius is 4x or 4(3) = 12 cm, and the height is
16x = 16(3) = 48 cm. Use the formula V = πr2h, or V = π(122) times
48. Evaluate the exponent: 144π(48) = 6,912π cubic centimeters.
21. b. Use the formula for the volume of a sphere to find the radius.
4
Multiply that value times two to get the diameter: V = 3πr3.
32π 4
= πr3 Substitute in the values.
3 3
3 32π 3 4
= πr3 Multiply both sides by the
4 3 4 3
reciprocal of the fraction.
8π = πr3 Simplify.
8π πr3

π = π Divide both sides by π.
3 3
= r
8 Take the cube root of each side.
2=r
Because the radius is 2, the diameter is 4 meters.
22. e. Diameter is given. Divide this measure by 2 to get the radius. The
radius is 7 inches. Use the formula to find the height. SA = 2(πr2)
+ 2πrh.
182π = 2(π72) + 2π 7 h Substitute in the values.
182π = 2(49π) + 14π(h) Evaluate the exponent and
multiply.
182π – 98π = 98π + 14π(h) – 98π Subtract 98π from both
sides.
84π = 14π(h) Combine like terms.
84π 14π(h)
14π 14π
6=h The height is 6 inches.
1
23. c. Use the formula for the volume of a cone: V = 3πr2h. Substitute in the
1
values given in the diagram: V = 3π122 16. Evaluate the exponent:
1
V = 3π 144 16. Multiply to get 768π cubic millimeters.
1
24. b. Use the formula for the volume of a pyramid: V = 3lwh. Substitute
1
in the values given in the diagram: V = 3 32 34 28. Multi-
ply to get 10,154.67 cubic centimeters, to the nearest hundredth.
25. d. All radii of a circle have the same measure. Use this fact and alge-
bra to solve for the variable x. Use this value to find the needed
measures, and then find the volume.
x=4 Divide both sides by 15.
The radius is 2x + 20 = 2(4) + 20 = 28 inches. The height is 3x =
3(4) = 12 inches.
1
The formula for the volume of a cone is: V = 3πr2h. Substitute in
1
the values to get V = 3 3.14 282 12. Evaluate the exponent:
1
3.14 784 12. Multiply to get 9,847.04 cubic inches, to the
3
nearest hundredth.
8
Transformations
and Similarity
P revious chapters addressed congruent figures. This chap-
ter deals with figures that undergo transformations, yet are con-
gruent to the original figure. Similar polygons are in proportion to the
original figure, and will also be covered. This chapter begins by assessing
your understanding of transformations and similarity. Take the bench-
mark quiz, and assess the knowledge you already possess on this topic.
After taking the quiz and reading over the explanations, the lesson will
follow to review subjects that you may have forgotten.
BENCHMARK QUIZ
1. What type of transformation does the following picture represent?
a. rotation
b. translation
c. reflection
d. dilation
e. congruence
238
TR AN S F O R MATI O N S AN D S I M I LAR IT Y 239
2. Which of the following letters has rotational symmetry?
a. the letter I
b. the letter A
c. the letter L
d. the letter T
e. the letter W
3. Which choice represents all of the symmetries present in the follow-

ing figure?
a. two lines of symmetry only

b. four lines of symmetry only
c. two lines of symmetry and rotational symmetry
d. four lines of symmetry and rotational symmetry
e. rotational symmetry only
4. Pentagons ABCDE ~ FGHIJ. What is the length of

HI?
a. 7 cm
b. 6 cm
c. 2 cm
d. 9 cm
e. 4 cm
5. If the triangles are similar, what is the scale factor from ΔQRS to
ΔXYZ?
a. 10
b. 3
c. 5
1
d. 3
1
e. 5
6. A toy rocket is a model of a real rocket with the scale of 1 : 48. If the
toy is 18" long, how long is the real rocket?
a. 72 inches
b. 30 inches
c. 864 feet
d. 66 inches
e. 72 feet
7. A man 5 feet tall casts a shadow that is 10 inches long. How tall is the
building that casts a shadow that is 14 inches long?
a. 5 feet, 4 inches
b. 9 feet
c. 7 feet
d. 2 feet
e. 8 inches
8. The two polygons in the following figure are similar. What is the
?
measure of CD
a. 5 mm
b. 20 mm
c. 2 mm
d. 18 mm
e. 12 mm
9. A 10-foot stop sign casts a shadow of 36 inches. How tall is the tele-
phone pole that casts a shadow of 48 inches long?
a. 11 feet
1
b. 133 feet
c. 9 feet
d. 22 feet
1
e. 133 inches
10. A photographer can blow up a picture. He must use a scale factor or

the picture will be distorted. Which dimensions below could be a pos-
sible size for an enlargement of a 3" 5" photograph?
a. 8" 10"
b. 12" 15"
c. 9" 12"
d. 5" 7"
e. 9" 15"
Following are the answers to the benchmark quiz. See how much you
already know about transformations and similarity. Explanations are pro-
vided for all problems.
1. c. The picture represents a flip over an imaginary line between, and

equidistant from, the two triangles. This transformation is called
a reflection.
2. a. The letter I is the only letter choice that has rotational symmetry.
It can be rotated 180° about a point at the middle of the letter and
map onto itself.
3. d. The figure shown has four lines of symmetry and rotational sym-
metry of 90°, as shown in the following figure.
4. d. The pentagons are similar; their sides are in proportion.

AB corre-
sponds to
GF, and
CD corresponds to
HI. Set up the proportion:
corresponding side of big pentagon corresponding side of big pentagon
= , and
corresponding side of little pentagon corresponding side of little pentagon
cross multiply to solve.

3
HI
= 6 Set up the proportion.
2
36=2 HI Cross multiply.
18 = 2
HI Multiply on the left side.
9=
HI Divide both sides by 2.
5. b. The scale factor is the dilation factor. ΔXYZ has sides that are
three times as big as ΔABC.
6. e. The ratio of toy rocket to real rocket is 1 to 48. The problem

states that the toy rocket is 18 inches long. The real rocket is
therefore 18 48 = 864 inches. This is not an answer choice.
Convert 864 inches to feet by dividing by 12, since there are 12
864
inches in a foot: 1
2 = 72 feet.
7. c. The building and the man, together with their corresponding

shadows, form two similar right triangles.
shadow of building
Use a proportion, with the setup of =
shadow of man
height of building
. Since the units on the shadow are both inches, unit
height of man
conversion is not needed; the height of the man is in feet, so the
height of the building, represented as the variable x, will be in feet.
14 x
10
14 5 = 10x Cross multiply.
70 = 10x Multiply the left side.
70 10x
10 0
7=x The building is 7 feet tall.
8. a. When polygons are similar, the measure of their sides is in pro-

portion. Set up an equation, using:
corresponding side of big trapezoid corresponding side of big trapezoid
= , and
corresponding side of little trapezoid corresponding side of little trapezoid
corresponds to side WZ
cross multiply to solve. AD , and CD

corresponds to
YZ:
16 10
=

Set up the proportion.
8 CD

16 CD = 8 10 Cross multiply.
16
CD = 80 Multiply the right side.

CD 80
16 =
16

16 Divide both sides by 16.
= 5 mm
CD
9. b. The telephone pole and the stop sign, together with their corre-
sponding shadows, form two similar right triangles.
Use a proportion, with the setup of:

shadow of pole height of pole
= . Since the units on the shadow
shadow of stop sign height of stop sign
are both inches, unit conversion is not needed; the height of the
stop sign is in feet, so the height of the telephone pole, represented
as the variable x, will be in feet.
48 x
36
480 = 36x Multiply the left side.
480 36x
36 6

13.3 = x is 1.
.3 3
1
The telephone pole is 133 feet tall.
10. e. The original photograph and the enlargement must be similar

rectangles. If the rectangles are similar, then each side is enlarged
by the same scale factor. The 9" 15" size is an enlargement with
a scale factor of 3. The other dimension choices do not have a
consistent scale factor.
If you answered 8–10 questions correctly, feel assured that you have a good
foundation in transformations and similarity. Read over the chapter; be sure
that you remember all the components of this topic. The sidebars and Tips
and Strategies may be especially helpful to you.
If you answered 4–7 questions correctly, you have some understanding
of the concepts covered, but you need to carefully study the lessons and
sidebars throughout the chapter. Go to the suggested website in the Extra
Help sidebar for additional practice. Work through the Practice Quiz at the
end of the chapter to check your progress.
If you answered 1–3 questions correctly, you need extended help in
understanding this chapter. Take your time as you read through this lesson.
Try the examples that are illustrated on a separate sheet of paper and com-
pare your method of solution with that given in the text. Attend to the side-
bars and visual aids that will help you grasp the material. Go to the
suggested website in the Extra Help sidebar in this chapter, and do extended
practice.

TRANSFORMATIONS AND SIMILARITY
There are many applications of geometry in mathematical problems. Not

only will this chapter deal with congruent polygons that are transformed,
it will address similar polygons that have the same shape but different size.
• Transformations
• Symmetry
• Dilations
• Similar Polygons
• Area, Volume, and Similar Polygons
• Applications of Similar Triangles
• Scale
TRANSFORMATIONS
Congruent geometric figures have the same size and shape. All correspon-
ding parts, the sides and angles, have the same measure. Polygons can be
moved by a slide, flip, or turn. These movements are called transformations.
GLOSSARY
TRANSLATION the image of a geometric figure after a slide in a set direction
REFLECTION the image of a geometric figure after a flip over a line of symmetry, an
imaginary line between and equidistant from the figure and its image
ROTATION the image of a geometric figure after a turn by a set number of degrees
around a point
Geometric figures can be transformed over interior lines and points, as

shown in the following diagram.
SYMMETRY
When a geometric figure is symmetric, the figure can be reflected over an

interior line or rotated from an interior point and it will map onto itself.
Two types of symmetry are line symmetry and rotational symmetry. Study
a geometric figure; see if you can draw an imaginary line, such that if you
folded the figure at this line, the figure would fall on top of itself. There can
be none, one, or several lines of symmetry for a figure.
EXTRA HELP
O Often, lines of symmetry are readily apparent. If you are unsure, trace
the geometric figure and actually fold the traced figure at the line in
question to determine if it is in fact a line of symmetry.
Rotational symmetry is present if there is a point in the interior of the

figure, usually somewhere in the center, where if you anchor this point and
rotate the figure, the figure will fall exactly on top of itself before one com-
plete rotation of 360°.
EXTRA HELP
O Like lines of symmetry, it is often obvious if a figure has rotational
symmetry. If you are unsure, trace the geometric figure. Leave it on top
of the original figure, anchor the point of symmetry in question and
actually rotate the traced figure.
Example:
How many lines of symmetry does this figure have?
The figure is a rhombus, as shown by the congruent sides. The

rhombus has two lines of symmetry:
The rhombus also has rotational symmetry. If it is rotated 180°

about the point shown, it will map onto itself. Point A will be at
Point C.
Example:
What types of symmetry does this isosceles trapezoid have?
The trapezoid does not have rotational symmetry. It would have to

be rotated a full 360° before it would map onto itself. This trapezoid
has one line of symmetry:
DILATIONS
The previous transformations preserved the size of the figure; the trans-
formed figure was congruent to the original. A fourth transformation, dila-
tion, changes the size of a geometric figure, and preserves the shape.
GLOSSARY
DILATION a shrinking or enlarging of a geometric figure that preserves shape but not
size
DILATION FACTOR a measure of how the transformed figure has changed size. The
dilation factor is a multiplicative operator on the measure of a geometric figure or on the
sides of a polygon.
Example:
What is the dilation factor from ΔPQR to ΔSTU?
The dilation factor is a fraction, since ΔSTU is smaller than ΔPQR.

1 1
The factor is 3, because 9 3 = 3.
SIMILAR POLYGONS
When a polygon is dilated, a similar polygon results. The dilation factor in

this case can be called a scale factor.
Example:
Rectangle ABCD is similar to rectangle EFGH. What is the scale
factor from ABCD to EFGH?
, which corresponds to AB
The scale factor is 4; EF , is four times as
big.
GLOSSARY
SIMILAR polygons have corresponding angles that are congruent, and corresponding
sides that are in proportion. The symbol for similarity is ~.
Similar polygons have the same shape (congruent angles), but can have
different size. If you are told that two polygons are similar, then their cor-
responding sides are in proportion. Set up a proportion if the scale factor
is not apparent.
RULE BOOK
E Recall that a proportion is an equation in which two ratios are equal.

You solve proportional problems by a method called cross multiplica-
tion. In a proportion, the product of the means is equal to the product
of the extremes, as shown in the following diagram:
Cross multiplication is a very easy procedure. Follow the example to

practice the procedure.
Example:
6 n
Solve: 26 = 52 ; use cross multiplication.
Show that the product of the means equals the product

of the extremes.
6 52 = 26 n Multiply 6 and 52.

312 = 26 n Divide 312 by 26 to find the missing term.
n = 12
The procedure for cross multiplication is straightforward and relatively

easy. The challenge in solving word problems using similar polygons is in
the set-up of the proportion. Take care to keep all corresponding sides in
order. Remember that you are comparing ratios and that the order of the
ratio set-up is significant. Choose one method of set-up and use it in all
problems. The examples that follow will use the set-up:
corresponding side of big polygon corresponding side of big polygon
= ,
corresponding side of little polygon corresponding side of little polygon
big big
shortened to just: = .
little little
Example:
In the following picture, rectangle ABCD is similar to rectangle
EFGH. Find FG.
corresponds to side HG
DC , and
BC corresponds to side FG.
length of
FG length of
GH
= Set up the proportion, knowing
length of
BC length of
CD
that the sides are proportional.
FG 30
= 8 Substitute in the values of the known
3
sides.

FG 8 = 3 30 Cross multiply.

FG 8 = 90 Multiply on the right side of the equation.

FG = 11.25 Divide both sides by 8 to get
FG.
Take care and pay attention to the units used in a problem. Sometimes,
it is helpful or necessary to convert units before setting up a ratio.
Example:
?
Rectangle ABCD ~ EFGH. What is the measure of GH
One side of rectangle ABCD is measured in inches, and another side

is measured in feet. Convert 1 foot to 12 inches before setting up
the proportion. Use the setup = , where
big big
little AD corresponds to
little
, and
EH CD corresponds to
GH:
36
GH
= 6 Substitute in the values of the known
12
sides.
36 6 = 12
GH Cross multiply.

216 = 12 GH Multiply on the left side of the equation.
18 =
GH Divide both sides by 12 to get side
GH.
is 18 inches.
Side GH
Sometimes, the similar polygons are inside each other. Solve this type of
similar polygon as you would the others, taking care to use the correct
measurements for each polygon.
Example:
The triangles shown in the following diagram are similar. What is
the measure of
CD?
The measure of AD is equal to 7 + 14 = 21 mm. This side corre-

sponds to AE.
CD corresponds to BE. Set up a proportion:
big big
= :
little little
21
CD

7 = 1
0 Substitute in the values of the known sides.
21 10 = 7
CD Cross multiply.

210 = 7 CD Multiply on the left side of the equation.
30 =
CD .
Divide both sides by 7 to get CD

CD is 30 mm.
AREA, VOLUME, AND SIMILAR POLYGONS
Corresponding sides of similar polygons are proportional, and a scale fac-

tor establishes the relationship of their measures. Recall from Chapter 6
that area is a multiplication concept—a squaring concept—where two
dimensions are multiplied together. If the ratio of the sides of similar poly-
gons is represented as a : b, the ratio of the areas will be a2 : b2. In Chapter
7 you reviewed that volume is a cubing concept, where three measures are
multiplied together. If the ratio of the sides of a geometric solid is repre-
sented as a : b, the ratio of the volumes will be a3 : b3.
Example:
If the sides of similar rectangles are in the ratio of 2 : 7, what is the
ratio of the areas of these rectangles?
The ratio of the areas will be 22 : 72, or 4 : 49.
Example:
If the surface area of two similar cubes is in the ratio of 25 : 9, what
is the ratio of the volume of these cubes?
Since the area is in the ratio of 25 : 9, the sides are in the ratio of
25
: 9 , or 5 : 3. Therefore, the ratio of the volumes is 53 : 33, or
125 : 27.
APPLICATION OF SIMILAR TRIANGLES
Right triangles are commonly used in conjunction with similar polygons to

measure tall objects such as trees or flagpoles. On a sunny day, the sun hits
all objects positioned at the same location at the same angle.
Notice from the above picture that two right triangles are formed, and
each triangle has the same angle measures. Because the triangles are simi-
lar, the angles are congruent. Therefore, the sides are in proportion. To
solve this type of problem, one way is to set up a proportion, such as:
shadow of big height of big
= .
shadow of little height of little
Example:
A woman, 68 inches tall, casts a shadow that is 54.4 inches long. If
the length of the shadow cast by the flagpole is 192 inches, how tall
is the flagpole?
shadow of big height of big

Use the set up: =
shadow of little height of little
192 h
= 68 Set up the proportion as suggested.
54.4
54.4 h = 192 68 Cross multiply.
54.4 h = 13,056 Divide each side of the equation by
54.4.
h = 240 inches, or 20 feet
SCALE
Scale is a special ratio used for models of real-life items, such as model rail-
roads and model airplanes, or scale drawings on blueprints and maps. On
model airplanes, you will often find the scale ratio printed on the model as
model : real. For example, a toy car may have the ratio 1 : 62 printed on the
bottom. This is the scale factor of all of the dimensions of the actual toy to
the corresponding dimensions of the real car. This scale factor says that the
real car is 62 times larger than the toy, since the ratio is 1 : 62.
Example:
A model locomotive measures 8.7 inches in length. If the scale given
is 1 : 16, how long is the real locomotive?
Since the real train is 16 times as big as the model, the real train will
be 8.7 times 16, which is 139.2 inches, or 11.6 feet.
On scale drawings, the scale will be a comparison of a small distance unit,

like inches, to a large distance unit, like feet. So, a scale on a map could read
“3 inches = 10 miles.” This means for every 3 inches on the map, it is 10
3
miles on the actual road. This ratio is 10 , but care should be taken to
remember that the units do not agree. On a scale drawing, if “1 inch = 10
feet,” this does not mean that the real item is 10 times bigger, even though
the ratio would be 1 : 10. You would have to convert to like units if you
wanted to know how they really compare. Solve scale-drawing problems as
you would any type of similarity problem, keeping the units consistent and
clear in your answer. Unit conversion is not needed to use the proportion
method.
Example:
3
A scale drawing of the Statue of Liberty is said to be “4 inch = 12
feet.” How tall is the statue if the scale drawing height is 10 inches?
Choose a set-up for the proportion, such as:
drawing dimension drawing dimension
=
real-object dimension real-object dimension
3

4 10

12 = h Set up the proportion, where h stands for
height.
3
12 10 = 4 h Cross multiply.
3
120 = 0.75 h Multiply 12 times 10; change 4 to 0.75.
160 = h Divide each side of the equation by 0.75.
According to this drawing, the height of the statue is 160 feet.
EXTRA HELP
O For further practice and extended lessons on similarity, refer to Geom-
etry Success in 20 Minutes a Day: Lesson 11, Ratio, Proportion, and
Similarity. In addition, the website www.math.com has helpful mini les-
sons on similar polygons: 1) Click on Pre-Algebra from the leftmost
column entitled Select Subject. Then, click on the following link, under
the title Ratios and Proportions: Similar Figures. 2) Click on Geometry
from the leftmost column entitled Select Subject. Then, click on the fol-
lowing link, under the title Relations and Sizes: Similar Figures. Another
useful website to study transformations is http://www.utc.edu/
~cpmawata/. On the leftmost side, under Math Cove Projects, click on
Rigid Transformations. There are interactive java-based activities to
explore transformations.
TIPS AND STRATEGIES
• A translation is a slide of a geometric figure in a set direction.

• A reflection is a flip of a geometric figure over a line.
• A rotation is a turn of a geometric figure around a point.
• Geometric figures can have lines of symmetry and rotational
symmetry.
• A dilation is a shrinking or enlarging of a geometric figure by a dila-
tion factor.
• Similar polygons have the same shape, but usually not the same size.
• For similar polygons, corresponding sides are in proportion and
corresponding angles are congruent.
• In a proportion, the product of the means equals the product of the
extremes.
• Solve proportions using cross multiplication.
• Take care to ensure a proper set-up when solving problems with
proportions.
• Scale is a special ratio that compares a model to a real-life object.
They are similar geometric figures.
PRACTICE QUIZ
Now that you have studied these lessons, see how much you have learned
and reviewed about transformations and similarity.
1. Which of the following statements are true about the figure below?
a. The figure has exactly one line of symmetry and rotational

symmetry.
b. The figure has exactly five lines of symmetry and no rotational
symmetry.
c. The figure has exactly one line of symmetry and no rotational
symmetry.
d. The figure has exactly five lines of symmetry and rotational
symmetry.
e. The figure has exactly ten lines of symmetry and rotational
symmetry.
2. Which figure below shows a single transformation of a translation?
a. figure I
b. figure II
c. figure III
d. figure IV
3. What type of transformation is shown in the following diagram?
a. rotation
b. reflection
c. slide
d. translation
e. dilation
4. Which of the following figures has both line symmetry and rotational
symmetry?
a. figures I and II
b. figure II only
c. figures II and III
d. figures I and III
e. all of the above
5. Which of the following statements are NOT ALWAYS true?

a. A dilation preserves the shape of a geometric figure.
b. A reflection preserves the shape of a geometric figure.
c. A translation preserves the size of a geometric figure.
d. A dilation preserves the size of a geometric figure.
e. A rotation preserves the shape of a geometric figure.
6. What is the dilation factor from similar triangles ABC to DEF?
1
a.
3
b. 3
c. 4
1
d. 6
1
e. 4
7. If the dilation factor is 1.5 from rectangle PQRS to rectangle WXYZ,

what is the length of XY?
a. 8.5 cm
b. 6.5 cm
c. 3.5 cm
d. 7.5 cm
e. 10.5 cm
?
8. Quadrilaterals ABCD ~ EFGH. What is the measure of FG
a. 2.25 feet
b. 4 feet
c. 5 feet
d. 3 feet
e. 6 feet
9. The ratio of the sides of two triangles is 3 : 5. What is the ratio of the
areas of these triangles?
a. 6 : 10
b. 3 : 5
c. 9 : 15
d. 15 : 25
e. 9 : 25
10. A flagpole casts a shadow of 18 feet. A man, 70 inches tall, casts a

shadow of 50 inches. How tall is the flagpole?
a. 25.2 feet
b. 16.2 feet
c. 1.35 feet
d. 196 inches
e. 16 feet
11. A scale drawing of the Statue of Liberty is 0.6 inches = 10 feet. If the
real statue is 160 feet in height, what is the height of the drawing?
a. 9.6 feet
b. 960 inches
c. 9.6 inches
d. 8 feet
e. 400 inches
12. An oak tree casts a shadow of 54 inches. The 15-foot telephone pole
casts a shadow of 2.25 feet. How tall is the tree?
a. 30 feet
b. 440 feet
c. 400 inches
d. 78.75 inches
e. 18.25 feet
13. In the following diagram, ΔXYZ ~ ΔLMN. What is the length of

LN?
a. 8 cm
b. 9 cm
c. 6 cm
d. 12 cm
e. 7.5 cm
14. A model boat is made to scale. The model has a length of 20 inches
and a width of 8 inches. What is the width of the real boat if the
length is 36 feet long?
a. 90 feet
b. 7.5 feet
c. 4.4 feet
d. 14.4 feet
e. 53 inches
15. The ratio of the surface area of one face of a cube to the surface area
of one face of another cube is 16 : 25. What is the ratio of the volume
of the smaller cube to the larger cube?
a. 32 : 50
b. 48 : 75
c. 256 : 625
d. 8 : 12.5
e. 64 : 125
16. The scaled model of a train is 25 cm long. If the real train is 12 meters
long, what is the scale factor?
a. 12 : 25
b. 1 : 48
c. 24 : 50
d. 1 : 13
e. 1 : 1,175
?
17. Given that ΔQRS ~ ΔQTU, what is the length of QU
a. 10 inches
b. 15 inches
c. 5 inches
d. 3 inches
e. 8 inches
18. How many lines of symmetry does this parallelogram have?
a. zero lines of symmetry

b. one line of symmetry
c. two lines of symmetry
d. four lines of symmetry
e. six lines of symmetry
19. What type of transformation is shown in the following figure?
a. translation
b. reflection
c. dilation
d. rotation
e. slide
20. Rectangle ABCD is similar to rectangle EFGH. What is the length of

?
GH
a. 5 meters
b. 9 meters
c. 4.5 meters
d. 6 meters
e. 1.5 meters
21. Juan, who is 5.5 feet tall, casts a shadow of 35 inches. How tall is
Miguel, who casts a shadow of 42 inches?
a. 6 feet, 6 inches
b. 6 feet, 5 inches
c. 6 feet, 2 inches
d. 6 feet
e. 6.6 feet
22. A map shows a scale of 1 cm = 4.5 m. How wide is a lake that meas-
ures 5.3 cm on the map?
a. 238.5 m
b. 23.85 m
c. 9.8 m
d. 980 cm
e. 1.18 m
23. A drawing is blown up for a billboard. The billboard is 7 feet by 5.6

feet. The drawing must be similar to the billboard. What are possi-
ble measurements for the drawing?
a. 3" 5"
b. 8" 11"
c. 3" 4.4"
d. 8" 10"
e. 12" 20"
24. What is the area of trapezoid ACDE if the area of trapezoid ABGF is
25, and the trapezoids are similar?
a. 156.25 cm2
b. 62.5 cm2
c. 32.5 cm2
d. 56.25 cm2
e. 27.5 cm2
25. An action figure of King Kong made to scale is 14 inches high. An

action figure of Godzilla is made to the same scale. If King Kong was
45 feet tall and Godzilla was 51.75 feet tall, how tall is the Godzilla
action figure to the nearest tenth?
a. 20.8 inches
b. 16.1 inches
c. 2.1 feet
d. 1.8 feet
e. 166.3 inches
ANSWERS
1. d. The star has five lines of symmetry and it also has rotational sym-
metry. The lines of symmetry are shown in the following:
2. c. Figure III shows a translation. Figure I is a reflection, figure II is a

dilation, and figure IV is a rotation.
3. b. The drawing shows a trapezoid being reflected, or flipped, over a

line between and equidistant from the two images.
4. c. Figures II and III have both line and rotational symmetry of 180°.
The lines of symmetry are shown in the following:
5. d. A dilation does not preserve the size of a geometric figure. It usu-

ally enlarges or shrinks a figure.
6. a. Triangle DEF is smaller, so the dilation factor is a fraction. It is

one-third the size of the original triangle ABC.
7. e. If the dilation factor is 1.5, multiply the measure of the side that
corresponds to , by 1.5; 7 1.5 = 10.5 cm.
XY, which is QR
8. b. The quadrilaterals are similar, so their corresponding sides are in

corresponds to
proportion. FG BC, and EF corresponds to
AB.
big big
Set up a proportion, using the setup of = :
little little
8 6

FG
8 3 = FG 6 Cross multiply.

24 = FG 6 Multiply on the left side of the equation.
4 =
FG Divide both sides by 6, so
FG = 4 ft.
9. e. If the sides have a ratio of 3 : 5, the areas will have a ratio of these
factors squared, that is 32 : 52 = 9 : 25.
10. a. The man and the flagpole, together with their corresponding
shadows, form similar right triangles.
Use a proportion, with the setup of:

shadow of flagpole height of flagpole
=
shadow of man height of man . Since the units for the man are
both inches, convert the flagpole shadow length to inches by mul-
tiplying by 12: 18 12 = 216 inches. Use the variable x to repre-
sent the height of the flagpole:
216 x
50
15,120 = 50x Multiply on the left side of the equation.
15,120 50x
50 0
302.4 inches = x
This is not one of the answer choices. Convert this to feet by divid-
ing by 12: 302.4 ÷ 12 = 25.2 feet.
model model
11. c. Set up a proportion to solve this problem:
real = real . The
model is measured in inches, and the real statue is measured in
feet. Use the variable x to represent the model height, which will
be in inches:
0.6 x
= Set up the proportion.
10 160
10x = 0.6 160 Cross multiply.
10x = 96 Multiply on the right side of the equation.
10x 96
10 10
x = 9.6 The height of the drawing is 9.6 inches.
12. a. The tree and the telephone pole, together with their correspon-
ding shadows, form similar right triangles.
shadow of tree height of tree

Use a proportion; the setup is = .
shadow of pole height of pole
Since the units for the telephone pole are both in feet, convert the
tree’s shadow length to feet by dividing 54 inches by 12: 54 ÷ 12 =
4.5 feet. Use the variable x for tree height:
4.5 x
2.25
4.5 15 = 2.25x Cross multiply.
67.5 = 2.25x Multiply on the left side of the equation.
67.5 2.25x
= Divide both sides by 2.25.
2.25 2.25
x = 30 The height of the tree is 30 feet.
corre-
13. c. The triangles are similar; the sides are in proportion. YZ
sponds to
MN and XZ corresponds to LN. Set up a proportion,
big big
using the setup of
little = little .
10
LN

5 = 3 Set up the proportion.
10 3 = 5
LN Cross multiply.
30 = 5
LN Multiply on the left side of the equation.
6 =
LN The length of the segment is 6 cm.
14. d. Set up a proportion, comparing width to length. The set up is:

width of model width of real
= . Note that because the real length of
length of model length of real
the boat is in feet, the width will also be in feet. Use the variable x
to represent the width. Because both models’ dimensions are in
inches, the units will not affect the set-up.
8 x
20
288 = 20x Multiply on the left side of the equation.
288 20x
20 0
14.4 = x The width is 14.4 feet.
15. e. If the areas are in the ratio of 16 : 25, the sides are in the ratio of
16: 25 , or 4 : 5. Therefore, the ratios of the volumes will be
43 : 53, or 64 : 125.
model
16. b. The scale factor is , and the units must be consistent. So,
real
change the meters to centimeters by multiplying by 100.
25 1
= x Set up the proportion.
1,200
25x = 1,200 1 Cross multiply.
25x = 1,200 Multiply on the right side of the equation.
25x 1,200
25 25
x = 48 The scale factor is 1 : 48.
big big
17. b. The triangles are similar, so set up a proportion using = .
little little
= 3 + 6 = 9.
The length of QT
9
QU
3
9 5 = 3
QU Cross multiply.

45 = 3 QU Multiply on the left side of the equation.
15 =
QU The length is 15 inches.
18. a. This parallelogram has no lines of symmetry.
19. d. The figure shows a turn, or a rotation of 90 degrees clockwise.

20. e. The rectangles are similar, so set up a proportion, using

big
corresponds to corresponds to
big
= . CD FG and BC GH.
little little
6 3
=
3 GH
6
QU = 3 3 Cross multiply.
6
QU = 9 Multiply on the right side of the equation.

QU = 1.5 Divide both sides by 6.
21. e. Juan and Miguel, together with their corresponding shadows,

form similar right triangles.
shadow of Miguel height of Miguel

Use a proportion; the setup is: shadow of Juan = height of Juan .
Since the units for the shadows are both inches, there is no need
to convert units; the units for Miguel’s height will be in feet. Use
the variable x for Miguel’s height:
42 x
= 5.5 Set up the proportion.
35
42 5.5 = 35x Cross multiply.
231 35x
35 35
6.6 = x Miguel is 6.6 feet tall.
map map
22. b. Use a proportion with the setup
real = real . The variable x will
represent the width of the real lake. Even though the units are dif-
ferent, no conversion is necessary; the answer will be in meters.
1 5.3
= x Set up the proportion.
4.5
x = 4.5 5.3 Cross multiply.
x = 23.85 m Multiply on the right side of the equation.
23. d. Find dimensions that would satisfy the similarity condition that
the sides are in proportion. You may need to test several of the
width width
answer choices. Set up a proportion of
length = length . The dimen-
sions of 8 by 10 will work:
5.6 8
= 10 Test the proportion.
7
5.6 10 = 7 8 Cross multiply.
56 = 56 Multiply on the both sides of the
equation. The proportion is true.
24. a. The sides are in a ratio of 5 : 12.5. The areas will be in the ratio of
52 : (12.5)2, or 25 : 156.25. This is because area is a squaring con-
cept. Since the area of the smaller trapezoid is 25, the area of the
larger trapezoid is 156.25 square cm.
model model
25. b. Use a proportion, with the setup:
real = real . Since the real
heights are both in feet, no unit conversions are needed. The
Godzilla model height will be in inches, the same as the King
Kong model height. Use the variable x to represent the height of
the Godzilla model:
14 x
= Set up the proportion.
45 51.75
14 51.75 = 45x Cross multiply.
724.5 = 45x Multiply on the left side of the equation.
724.5 45x
45 5
16.1 = x The Godzilla figure is 16.1 inches tall.
9
Pythagorean Theorem
and Trigonometry
O ther chapters in this book have dealt with the most common
geometric figure, the triangle. Chapter 4 covered the basic proper-
ties and classification of triangles. Chapter 6 reviewed the perimeter and
area of triangles. This chapter will review applications that involve the right
triangle. Take the following benchmark quiz that starts this chapter to assess
the knowledge you already possess about right triangle applications.
271
BENCHMARK QUIZ
1. In the following right triangle, what is the measure of

YZ, to the near-
est hundredth?
Y
8 cm
X Z
6 cm
a. 100 cm
b. 5.29 cm
c. 10 cm
d. 3.74 cm
e. 28 cm
?
2. If the sin ∠ACB = 0.5, what is the length of AB
A
B C
8 ft
a. 4 feet
b. 5 feet
c. 16 feet
d. 50 feet
e. 10 feet
P Y THAG O R EAN TH E O R E M AN D TR I G O N O M ETRY 273
3. What is the measure of

PR to the nearest hundredth?
R
18 mm
10 mm
Q
a. 224 mm
b. 14.97 mm
c. 4.05 mm
d. 6.24 mm
e. 2 mm
4. In the following triangle, what is the length of

XY to the nearest hun-
dredth?
W X
15 cm
40º
Y
a. 9.64 cm
b. 2.67 cm
c. 300 cm
d. 5.63 cm
e. 11.49 cm
5. The volleyball net shown is 6.5 feet tall. If the anchor cord is 8 feet
long, how far away is the stake from the bottom of the pole?
a. 5 feet
b. 1.5 feet
c. 4.67 feet
d. 21.75 feet
e. 16 feet
6. A boat sights a lighthouse at an angle of elevation of 23°. If the light-

house is 40 feet tall, how far away is the boat from the base of the
lighthouse?
a. 63 feet
b. 32.73 feet
c. 15.63 feet
d. 94.23 feet
e. 43.45 feet
7. What is the tangent of ∠BAC?
2
a.
7
7
b.
2
c. 53

d. 7.2
e. 2.7
8. Liz walks 5 blocks north and 3 blocks east to get to school. How
much shorter would she walk, to the nearest hundredth of a block, if
she could walk the shortest path?
a. 2.17 blocks
b. 4 blocks
c. 5.83 blocks
d. 1 block
e. 8 blocks
9. What is the length of the diagonal of rectangle ABCD, to the nearest

hundredth?
a. 21 inches
b. 31.5 inches
c. 7.94 inches
d. 225 inches
e. 15 inches
10. Given the figure below, what is the length of

DG?
a. 10 mm
b. 5 mm
c. 8.66 mm
d. 20 mm
e. 2.5 mm
1. c. Use the Pythagorean theorem: a2 + b2 = c2. Set a = 6, b = 8,

and c =
YZ, to get
62 + 82 = c2
36 + 64 = c2 Evaluate exponents.
100 = c2 Add like terms on the left.
100
= c2 Take the square root of both sides.
10 = c
YZ = 10 cm.
2. a. The sin ratio is

opposite
, is the hypotenuse, and AB
and BC is
hypotenuse
:
the side opposite to ∠ACB. Set up an equation to solve for AB

AB
0.5 = 8 Set up the equation.
4= AB Multiply both sides by 8 to get

AB = 4 feet.
3. b. Use the Pythagorean theorem: a2 + b2 = c2. Set a = 10, b =

PR, and
c = 18, to get
102 + b2 = 182
100 + b2 = 324 Evaluate exponents.
100 + b2 – 100 = 324 – 100 Subtract 100 from both sides of
the equation.
b2 = 224 Combine like terms.
b2 = 224
Take the square root of both sides.
b = 14.97 R
P = 14.97, rounded to the
nearest hundredth.
4. e.
XY is the side adjacent to the angle of 40°, and the side measuring
15 cm is the hypotenuse. Use the cosine ratio to solve for the
adjacent
adjacent side: cosine ratio =
hypotenuse .

XY
cos 40° = 15 Set up the equation.
(cos 40°) 15 =
XY Multiply both sides by 15.
11.49 =
XY Perform the cosine function, and
multiply to get
XY rounded to
the nearest hundredth.
5. c. The pole and the cord form a right triangle. Use the Pythagorean
theorem: a2 + b2 = c2. The cord is the hypotenuse of the triangle.
The distance needed is b in the formula. Set a = 6.5, and c = 8, to get
6.52 + b2 = 82
42.25 + b2 = 64 Evaluate exponents.
42.25 + b2 – 42.25 = 64 – 42.25 Subtract 42.25 from both sides.
b2 = 21.75 Combine like terms.
b2 = 21.75
Take the square root of both
sides.
b = 4.67 The distance is 4.67 feet,
rounded.
6. d. The boat and the lighthouse form a right triangle. The height of
the lighthouse is the side opposite to the angle of 23°. The dis-
tance from the boat to the lighthouse is the adjacent side to the
opposite
angle. Use the tangent ratio =
adjacent . Use the variable x to repre-
sent the distance from the boat to the lighthouse.
40
tan 23° = x Set up the equation.
(tan 23°)x = 40 Multiply both sides by x.
94.23 = x Divide both sides by the tangent of
23°, to find the distance, rounded
to the nearest hundredth.
opposite
7. b. The tangent ratio is . The side opposite the angle is 7 and
adjacent
7
the side adjacent to the angle is 2, or 2.
8. a. Draw a picture of the situation.
Her walk forms a right triangle, and the hypotenuse would be the
shortest path. Use the Pythagorean theorem: a2 + b2 = c2. Set a = 5,
and b = 3, to get
52 + 32 = c2
34 = c2 Combine like terms.
34 = c2 Take the square root of both sides.
5.83 = c The shortest distance is 5.83
blocks, rounded.
Her walk was 5 + 3 = 8 blocks. The shortcut is 5.83 blocks. She
would thus walk 8 – 5.83 = 2.17 blocks shorter to get to school.
9. e. Use the Pythagorean theorem: a2 + b2 = c2. The diagonal is the

hypotenuse of a right triangle formed by two of the sides. Set a =
9, and b = 12, to get
92 + 122 = c2
225
= c2 Take the square root of both sides.
15 = c The length of the diagonal, an exact
measurement.
10. d. The figure shows an altitude drawn to the hypotenuse of a large

right triangle, forming two smaller right triangles. The three
right triangles are similar. Break the triangles apart to see the rela-
tionship of the sides.
EG is a shared side to both.
Set up the sides of the smaller triangles in a proportion:

DG
EG

=

.
EG FG

DG 10
10
5 = 10 10
DG Cross multiply.

DG 5 = 100 Multiply on the right side of the
equation.

DG = 20 Divide both sides by 5.
BENCHMARK QUIZ RESULTS:
If you answered 8–10 questions correctly, you have a good understanding

of right triangle relationships and applications. Perhaps the questions you
answered incorrectly deal with one specific area in this chapter. Read over
the chapter, concentrating on those areas of weakness. Proceed to the Prac-
tice Quiz at the end of the chapter and try to improve your score.
If you answered 4–7 questions correctly, there are several areas you need
to review. Carefully read through the lesson in this chapter for review and
skill building. Work carefully through the examples and pay attention to the
sidebars referring you to definitions, hints, and shortcuts. Get additional
practice on geometry by visiting the suggested websites and working
through the Practice Quiz at the end of the chapter.
If you answered 1–3 questions correctly, spend some time studying this
chapter. By carefully reading this chapter and concentrating on the visual
aids, you will gain a better understanding of this topic. Go to the suggested
websites in the Extra Help sidebar in this chapter, which will provide addi-
tional help and extended practice. You may also want to refer to Geometry
Success in 20 Minutes a Day, published by LearningExpress. Lessons 8 and
20 in the book are devoted to these concepts.

PYTHAGOREAN THEOREM AND TRIGONOMETRY
The Pythagorean theorem and trigonometry are two very common and
practical applications for right triangles. Follow the lesson in this chapter
to review the basic concepts of right triangles, which you can apply in word
problems.

• Similar Right Triangles

• Identifying the Sides of a Right Triangle
• The Pythagorean Theorem
• Special Right Triangles
• Applications of the Pythagorean Theorem
• Identifying the Opposite and Adjacent Sides of a Right Triangle
• The Trigonometric Ratios
• Applications of Trigonometry
SIMILAR RIGHT TRIANGLES
Chapter 8 described similar polygons. A special case of similarity arises with

right triangles.
RULE BOOK
E When an altitude is drawn from the hypotenuse of a right triangle, two

smaller right triangles emerge. All three triangles are similar to one
another.
When this type of problem is encountered, it is helpful to break the

three triangles apart as shown:
Example:
In the following diagram, what is the length of
DC?
Separate the triangles, and find the corresponding sides:

DC on the larger of the two triangles corresponds to
BD on the
smaller of the two triangles.
BD on the larger of the two triangles
on the smaller of the two triangles.
corresponds to AD
big big
BD
DC
Set up a proportion, using = , =
little little
AD BD :

12 x
= 12 Set up the proportion, using the variable x
6
for the unknown.
144 6x
6
24 = x is 24 inches.
DC
IDENTIFYING THE SIDES OF A RIGHT TRIANGLE
Right triangles are special triangles used for measuring objects that would
otherwise be difficult to measure directly, such as the height of a tall tree.
In a right triangle, the base and one side are perpendicular.
GLOSSARY
HYPOTENUSE of a right triangle is the side of the right triangle that is opposite the
right angle
LEGS of a right triangle are the two sides of the right triangle that make up the right
angle
In right triangles, there is a special relationship between the hypotenuse

and the legs of the triangle. This relationship is always true and it is known
as the Pythagorean theorem.
THE PYTHAGOREAN THEOREM
RULE BOOK
E The Pythagorean theorem states that in all right triangles, the sum of
the squares of the two legs is equal to the square of the hypotenuse;
leg2 + leg2 = hypotenuse2.
The converse of the Pythagorean theorem is also true: In a triangle,
the sum of the squares of the legs is equal to the square of the
hypotenuse if and only if the triangle is a right triangle.
SHORTCUT
" You can remember the Pythagorean theorem as the well-known formula:
a2 + b2 = c2, where a and b are the two legs of the right triangle, and c
is the hypotenuse.
Special note: Be careful! There is nothing special about the letters
a, b, and c. A test question could be “tricky” and could call one of the
legs c.
Example:
Find m to the nearest hundredth.
Use the Pythagorean theorem a2 + b2 = c2, where a and b are 6 mm

and 14 mm and c is the unknown, m. Note that it does not matter
whether you set a = 6 and b = 14, or a = 14 and b = 6, due to the
commutative property of addition.
a2 + b2 = c2 Substitute in the given lengths.

62 + 142 = m2 Evaluate the exponents, left to right.
36 + 196 = m2 Perform addition.
232 = m2 Take the square root of 232 to find m.
232
=m The value of m will be approximate, to the
nearest hundredth and include the units.
15.23 mm = m
CALCULATOR TIPS
i Use the key on the calculator to find the square of a number.

To calculate 142 on the calculator, enter:
Use the
key to find the square root of a number. Depending on your specific

calculator, this key is used either before or after you enter the radi-
cand. To find 289
, enter
Example:
Find the value of y in the following diagram:
This is a right triangle, where the hypotenuse is 26 m and one of the

legs is 24 m. This is a multiple of the common Pythagorean triple,
5, 12, 13, so the Pythagorean triple is 10, 24, 36 by multiplying each
length by two. The unknown side, y, is therefore 10 m.
SHORTCUT
" There are three sets of Pythagorean triples that appear over and over
again in math test problems. Knowing these three common triples will
save you valuable time in working problems of this type.
a b c
One set is: 3 4 5
and multiples thereof: 6 8 10
9 12 15
12 16 20
Another set is: 5 12 13

and multiples thereof: 10 24 26
15 36 39
The third set is: 8 15 17

16 30 34
Memorize these sets: {3, 4, 5}, {5, 12, 13} and {8, 15, 17}. If a right tri-
angle problem is given and two of the three numbers in one set
appear (or multiples of the two numbers), you can avoid all the sub-
stituting and calculating and save precious test time.
SPECIAL RIGHT TRIANGLES
Some special right triangles have side relationships that are helpful to
memorize.
SHORTCUT
" In a 30°–60°–90° triangle, the hypotenuse is twice the length of the
shorter side, and the longer side length is the length of the shorter
side, multiplied by the square root of three:
In an isosceles right triangle, the length of the hypotenuse is the

length of a leg, multiplied by the square root of two:
The altitude of an equilateral triangle forms two smaller congruent tri-

angles that are 30°–60°–90° triangles.
APPLICATIONS OF THE PYTHAGOREAN THEOREM
The Pythagorean theorem is often embedded in word problems, where a

right triangle is formed from the given situation.
Example:
A volleyball net is staked to the ground as shown in the diagram:
The cord on the stake is 15 feet, and the pole is 9 feet tall. How far
from the bottom of the pole is the stake (value n in the diagram)?
The cord, the pole, and the distance from the bottom of the pole to
the stake form a right triangle. The cord in this diagram is the
hypotenuse of the right triangle. The height of the pole, 9 feet, is one
of the legs. The unknown is the other leg.
a2 + b2 = c2 Substitute in the given lengths.
92 + b2 = 152 Evaluate the exponents, left to right.
81 + b2 = 225 Subtract 81 from 225.
b2 = 144 Take the square root of 144 to find b.
b = 144
The value of b is 12; include units in the
answer.
b = 12 ft
Note that this problem could have been solved using the shortcut, as 9,
12, 15 is a multiple of the common Pythagorean triple of 3, 4, 5.
IDENTIFYING THE OPPOSITE AND ADJACENT

SIDES OF A RIGHT TRIANGLE
The legs of a right triangle can be defined in reference to one of the acute
angles in the triangle.
GLOSSARY
ADJACENT side to an acute angle, in a right triangle, is the side of the triangle that is
a side of the angle, and not the hypotenuse
OPPOSITE side to an acute angle, in a right triangle, is the side of the triangle that is
across from the angle in question
Note that the side that is adjacent to one of the acute angles is opposite to the other
acute angle.
THE TRIGONOMETRIC RATIOS
The word trigonometry means, “measure of right triangles.” Common com-

parisons, or ratios, are made between the sides of right triangles. These are
known as the trigonometric ratios, and these ratios reference one of the acute
angles in a right triangle.
GLOSSARY
SINE (SIN) of an angle is the ratio that compares the side opposite the angle, in a right
triangle, to the hypotenuse of the triangle
COSINE (COS) of an angle is the ratio that compares the side adjacent the angle, in
a right triangle, to the hypotenuse of the triangle
TANGENT (TAN) of an angle is the ratio that compares the side opposite the angle,
in a right triangle, to the side adjacent to the angle
SHORTCUT
" You may recall from your school days, the mnemonic device to
O A O
remember the trigonometric ratios: SOH–CAH–TOA, or S H–C H–T A,
where S = sin, C = cos, T = tan, O = opposite, A = adjacent, and
H = hypotenuse.
Example:
In the following right triangle, what is the tan ∠C?
The side opposite to ∠C is 12 m and the side adjacent to ∠C is 9 m.

opposite 12 m 12 4
Use the tangent ratio of ,
adjacent to get
9 m = 9 , or alternately 3 in
lowest terms.
Sometimes, the ratios are given as a fraction, and other times they are
given as a decimal.
Example:
If the cos ∠Q = 0.5 in the following triangle, what is the length of

PQ?
adjacent
The cosine ratio is , so set up an equation:
hypotenuse

PQ
= 0.5 Substitute in the known values.
10
= 5
PQ Multiply both sides by 10.
CALCULATOR TIPS
i You will need a scientific calculator to find the trigonometric ratios.

Most often, tests will present angles in degrees. First, ensure that your
calculator is in degree mode. The method of changing the angle mode
will vary for each individual calculator, so check your manual. Try the
examples below, and others in this chapter, to be sure your calcula-
tor is in the correct mode.
To find a trigonometric ratio from the calculator, use the following
keys:
Your calculator will return the ratio as a decimal. Some calculators

require the angle measure followed by the specific trig key and oth-
ers require the trig key first, followed by the angle measure. Check
your calculator with the example below to see which type you have:
Example:
Find the sin of 30°.
In some problems, the trigonometric ratio is given for a right triangle

and the actual angle measure is requested. Use your calculator to find
these angle measures.
Example:
Given the following right triangle, what is the measure of ∠XYZ, to
the nearest tenth of a degree?
The side opposite to ∠XYZ has a length of 7 and the hypotenuse has
opposite
a length of 9. Use the sine ratio, , and the sin–1 key on the
hypotenuse
calculator.
7
sin ∠XYZ = 9 Use the sin–1 key.
If your calculator has fraction keys, enter the fraction when using
the sin–1 key. Otherwise, use 0.7777 as an approximation for the
given fraction.
The angle is ∠XYZ = 51.1°, rounded to the nearest tenth of a
degree.
CALCULATOR TIPS
i If the trigonometric ratio is given, and the angle is required, use the
following calculator keys, which are typically the second function
above the regular trigonometry keys:
Example:
If the tangent of an angle is 1.0, what is the value of the angle?
Use the calculator and enter these strokes:
If the trigonometric ratio is rounded, the angle degree measure may

also have to be rounded, as in the following example:
Example: If the sin of an angle is approximately 0.866, what is the

value of the angle?
Use the calculator and enter these strokes:
Your calculator gives an angle measure of 59.99708907, which would

round to 60°. Caution: Do not round trigonometric values until the end
of the calculations. When a problem asks for a rounded answer, use
the calculator to keep accuracy throughout the calculations, and
round only the final answer. If your calculator does not have paren-
theses or fraction keys, use at least four decimal places in the approx-
imation of any trigonometric ratio.
APPLICATIONS OF TRIGONOMETRY
Trigonometry is often embedded in word problems where a right triangle

is formed from the given situation. A common application uses an angle of
elevation or an angle of depression. A surveyor uses a tool to calculate the
height of an object, such as a tree. He stands a set distance from the tree,
and then measures the angle of elevation to the top of the tree:
Note that this situation is in essence a right triangle trigonometry prob-

lem, where the height of the tree is the side opposite to the angle of elevation.
An airplane pilot, knowing his height above the ground, can determine
the length of the horizontal distance between the plane and the edge of the
runway by measuring the angle of depression:
Again, this situation is a right triangle trigonometry problem. Note that

the angle of depression is the same angle used in the angle of elevation of
the preceding problem.
Example:
A fisherman wants to know how far his boat is from shore. On the
edge of the shore is a lighthouse, which stands 50 feet in height.
The fisherman sights the top of the lighthouse at an angle of 25°.
How far is the boat from shore, to the nearest tenth?
Draw a picture of the situation:
The height of the lighthouse is the side opposite the angle of 25°.
The distance from the boat to the shore is the side adjacent to the
opposite
25° angle. Use the tangent ratio,
adjacent , to find the distance, repre-
sented as x:
50
tan 25° = x Set up the equation with the given
information.
(tan 25°)x = 50 Multiply both sides by x.
(tan 25°)x 50
= Divide both sides by the tangent of 25°.
(tan 25°) (tan 25°)
x = 107.2 feet Round to the nearest tenth.
EXTRA HELP
O If you need extended help in working with geometry, refer to the book
Geometry Success in 20 Minutes a Day, published by LearningExpress.
There are useful web sites that deal with the Pythagorean theorem
and trigonometry.
1. The website http://library.thinkquest.org/20991/geo/stri.html is
a tutorial on the concepts covered in this chapter.
2. The website www.math.com is another source of help. Once at
the site, click on Geometry, which you will find on the left under
Select Subject. From this page, select The Pythagorean Theorem
and right triangle facts, under Relations and Sizes. Each topic has a
lesson, followed by an interactive quiz. Answers to all quizzes are
provided.
TIPS AND STRATEGIES
• When an altitude to a right triangle is drawn, two smaller right tri-

angles are formed, and the three triangles are similar.
• Familiarize yourself with the parts of a right triangle.
• The Pythagorean theorem is used to make measurements with
right triangles.
• The Pythagorean theorem is leg2 + leg2 = hypotenuse2, or a2 + b2 = c2.
• Know the common Pythagorean triples and how to find their
multiples.
• The trigonometric ratios compare the sides of a right triangle.
• Be familiar with triangle sides that are opposite and adjacent to a
given angle.
• Know how to use your calculator with the trigonometric ratios.
opposite O
• Sine of an angle is the ratio of
hypotenuse , S H , or SOH.
adjacent A
• Cosine of an angle is the ratio of , C , or CAH.
hypotenuse H
opposite O
• Tangent of an angle is the ratio of
adjacent , T A , or TOA.
• For word problems, draw a picture, and identify the right triangle
formed.
PRACTICE QUIZ
1. What is the value of n in the following right triangle, to the nearest

hundredth?
a. 4.47 mm
b. 7.21 mm
c. 5 mm
d. 10 mm
e. 3.16 mm
2. What is the sin ∠A?
3
a.
5
4
b.
5
3
c.
4
4
d.
3
e. 45°
in the following triangle, to the nearest

3. What is the length of MN
hundredth?
a. 13.93 m
b. 2.45 m
c. 8 m
d. 144 m
e. 12 m
4. What is the tangent of ∠P?
9
a.
12
12
b.
15
12
c.
9
9
d.
15
e. 53°
5. Lara walks 7 blocks west and then 2 blocks south to get to the sta-
dium. How much shorter is the walk, to the nearest hundredth block,
if she could walk a straight line?
a. 7.28 blocks
b. 1.72 blocks
c. 4.5 blocks
d. 4.24 blocks
e. 2 blocks
6. When it is 5,000 feet above the ground, an airplane sights the 10-foot
tall control tower at an angle of depression of 50°. What is the hori-
zontal distance, to the nearest foot, from the tower to the plane?
a. 4,195 feet
b. 6,527 feet
c. 7,779 feet
d. 4,187 feet
e. 5,959 feet
7. What is the length of the diagonal, to the nearest hundredth, of a

square whose side is 12.5 cm long?
a. 25 cm
b. 7.07 cm
c. 17.68 cm
d. 12.5 cm
e. 156.25 cm
8. Katy rides the chair lift on the ski slope. The lift is 1,200 feet long,
and rises 1,000 feet vertically. What is the angle, ∠B, that the slope
makes with the horizontal, to the nearest degree?
a. 56°
b. 200°
c. .83°
d. 34°
e. 12°
, in the following right triangle, to the near-

9. What is the length of HI
est tenth?
a. 11.5 inches
b. 21 inches
c. 3 inches
d. 1 inch
e. 4.6 inches
?
10. If the sin ∠T = 0.8, what is the length of ST
a. 8.04 mm
b. 8.09 mm
c. 4.2 mm
d. 6 mm
e. 10 mm
11. In ΔWXV, if ?

XV = 7 feet, what is the length of WX
a. 73 feet
b. 72 feet
c. 14 feet
d. 3.5 feet
e. 7 feet
12. ΔQRS is an isosceles right triangle. What is the length of the

hypotenuse if the leg of the triangle is 8
inches long?
a. 4 inches
b. 8 2 inches
c. 16 inches
d. 2 inches
e. 2 inches
13. A conveyor belt at the shipping company is constructed as shown:
How long is the full length of the conveyor belt, to the nearest foot?
a. 5 ft
b. 10 ft
c. 12 ft
d. 17 ft
e. 13 ft
4
14. If the sin ∠DEF = 5, what is the cos ∠DFE?
4
a.
5
3
b.
5
3
c.
4
5
d.
4
5
e.
3
15. What is the height of an equilateral triangle whose side is 20 mm

long?
a. 203 mm
b. 103 mm
c. 102 mm
d. 7.75 mm
e. 10 mm
16. What is the measure of ∠XYZ?
a. 22.63°
b. 90°
c. .8°
d. 60°
e. 45°
17. What is the measure of a side of a square whose diagonal is 10 inches

long, to the nearest hundredth?
a. 5 inches
b. 7.07 inches
c. 14.14 inches
d. 3.16 inches
e. 4.47 inches
to the nearest
18. In the following triangle, what is the length of AB
tenth?
a. 31.3 m
b. 20.1 m
c. 15.4 m
d. 37.3 m
e. 18.4 m
19. Which of the given side measures for a triangle forms a right triangle?
a. 3, 4, and 6
b. 9, 12, and 13
c. 6, 7, and 12
d. 12, 15, and 17
e. 15, 20, and 25
20. What is the measure of ∠JKL to the nearest degree?
a. 53°
b. 37°
c. .49°
d. 41°
e. 13°
, to the nearest hundredth?

21. What is the length of AC
a. 6 cm
b. 12 cm
c. 3.46 cm
d. 2.45 cm
e. 12.49 cm
6
22. If the cos ∠LMN is 10, what is the sin ∠LMN?
6
a.
10
10
b.
6
8
c.
10
10
d.
8
6
e.
8
23. A 17-foot ladder rests on a building as shown:
If the base of the ladder is 8 feet away from the building, how high up
the building does the ladder touch?
a. 19 ft
b. 18 ft
c. 15 ft
d. 98 ft
e. 353
ft
24. What is the length of x in the following diagram?
a. 1 mm
b. 8 mm
c. 2 mm
d. 6 mm
e. 4 mm
25. A surveyor sights the top of a tree at an angle of elevation of 70°. If

he is 15 feet away from the bottom of the tree, how tall is the tree to
the nearest foot?
a. 14 ft
b. 41 ft
c. 5 ft
d. 68 ft
e. 10 ft
ANSWERS
1. b. Use the Pythagorean theorem: a2 + b2 = c2. Set a = 6, b = 4, and c =

n, to get
62 + 42 = n2
36 + 16 = n2 Evaluate exponents.
52 = n2 Add like terms on the left.
52 = n 2 Take the square root of both sides.
7.21 = n The value is 7.21 to the nearest hundredth.
opposite
2. a. The sine ratio is .
hypotenuse The side opposite to ∠A is 3 and the
hypotenuse is 5.
3. e. You can use the Pythagorean theorem to find the length of the
missing leg, or you can recognize that this is a common
Pythagorean triple, namely the 5–12–13 triple.
opposite
4. c. The tangent ratio is .
adjacent The side opposite to ∠P is 12 and
and the side adjacent to ∠P is 9.
5. b. Draw a picture of the situation.
Her walk forms a right triangle, and the hypotenuse would be the
shortest path. The shortest distance between two points is a
straight line. Use the Pythagorean theorem: a2 + b2 = c2. Set a = 7,
and b = 2, to get
72 + 22 = c2
53 = c2 Take the square root of both sides
7.28 = c The shortest distance is 7.28, rounded.
Her walk was 7 + 2 = 9 blocks. The shortcut is 7.28 blocks. She
would thus walk 9 – 7.28 = 1.72 blocks shorter to get to the stadium.
6. d. From the diagram, the side opposite the angle of 50° is 5,000 – 10
or 4,990. The horizontal distance from the tower to the plane is
the side adjacent to the angle. Use the tangent ratio, which
opposite
is
adjacent . Use the variable x to represent the horizontal distance.
4,990
tan 50˚ = x Set up the equation.
(tan 50°)x = 4,990 Multiply both sides by x.
x = 4,187 Divide both sides by the tan 50° to get the
distance, rounded to the nearest foot.
7. c. Draw a picture:
The diagonal is the hypotenuse of an isosceles triangle, whose sides

are 12.5. This is a special triangle, so the hypotenuse is 12.5 2

= 17.68 cm, to the nearest hundredth.
8. a. From the diagram, the chair lift length is the hypotenuse and the
vertical distance is the side opposite to ∠B. Use the sine ratio,
opposite
which is
hypotenuse .
1,000
sin ∠B =
1,200 Set up the equation.
∠B = 56 Use the sin–1 key to find the angle,
rounded to the nearest degree.
9. d. Use the Pythagorean theorem: a2 + b2 = c2. Set a = 2, and c = 5

,
to get
22 + b2 = (5)2
2
4+b =5 Evaluate exponents.
4 + b2 – 4 = 5 – 4 Subtract 4 from both sides.
b2 = 1 Take the square root of both sides.
b=1
HI = 1 inch
opposite
10. e. The sine ratio is
hypotenuse . The side opposite is 8 and the

hypotenuse is ST. Set up an equation:
8
0.8 =
Set up an equation.
ST
0.8
ST = 8 Multiply both sides by
ST.

ST = 10 Divide both sides by 0.8.
11. c. ΔWXV is a 30–60–90 special right triangle. The hypotenuse is

twice the length of the shorter side, the side opposite the 30°
angle. (In this case with length of 7.) The hypotenuse is thus 14.
12. a. The hypotenuse of an isosceles right triangle is 2

leg of the
triangle; 2
8
= 16 = 4.
13. d. Notice that there are two triangles on either end of the belt sys-
tem, which are both 30–60–90 right triangles. The conveyor belt
section on either end, represented as x, is twice the side opposite
to the 30° angle. The variable x = 5 feet. The entire conveyor belt
is 5 + 7 + 5 = 17 feet.
opposite
14. a. Draw in the known sides, because the sine ratio is :
hypotenuse
adjacent
The cosine ratio is hypotenuse , and the adjacent side to ∠DFE is 4.
4
The cos ∠DFE is 5 .

15. b. Draw a picture of the triangle, with the height shown:
The height is also an altitude, so it forms two 30–60–90 right tri-

angles. The side opposite to the 30° angle, DC, is one half the
hypotenuse, 20 mm. DC = 10 mm. The side opposite to the 60°
angle, the altitude, is 103 mm long.
16. e. In the diagram, the sides opposite and adjacent to the angle are
shown. Use the tangent ratio to find the angle measure. Tangent
opposite
is
adjacent .
16
tan ∠XYZ = 16 Set up the equation.
tan ∠XYZ = 1
∠XYZ = 45° Use the tan–1 key to find the angle.
This problem could have been easily solved without trigonome-
try. This is an isosceles right triangle, so the acute angle is 45°.
17. b. Draw the square, with the diagonal. The diagonal is the
hypotenuse of an isosceles right triangle. Use the Pythagorean
theorem, a2 + b2 = c2. Set a = b, and c = 10, to get
a2 + a2 =102
2a2 = 100 Combine like terms.
a2 = 50 Divide both sides by 2.
a2 = 50 Take the square root of both sides.
a = 7.07 The side of the square is 7.07 to the near-
est hundredth.
18. d. From the diagram, the side of length 24 is adjacent to the angle,
is the hypotenuse of the right triangle. Use the cosine
and AB
adjacent
ratio, that is .
hypotenuse
24
cos 50° =
AB Set up the equation.
cos 50° AB = 24 .
Multiply both sides by AB
= 37.3
AB Divide both sides by the cos 50°, and
round.
19. e. Test the pairs by using the Pythagorean theorem. If the theorem
holds, the triangle is a right triangle. If it does not hold, the trian-
gle is NOT a right triangle. Test each choice:
Choice a: 32 + 42 = 62, 9 + 16 = 36 is NOT true. Choice b: 92 + 122

= 132, 81 + 144 = 169 is NOT true. Choice c: 62 + 72 = 122, 36 + 49
= 144 is NOT true. Choice d: 122 + 152 = 172, 144 + 225 = 289 is
NOT true. Choice e: 152 + 202 = 252, 225 + 400 = 625 is a true
statement. Choice e is the right triangle. Time could have been
saved if it had been recognized that 15, 20, and 25 is a multiple of
the common {3, 4, 5} triple.
20. a. From the diagram, the opposite and adjacent side measures are
opposite
given for the angle. Use the tangent ratio, which is
adjacent .
8
tan ∠JKL = 6 Set up the equation.
∠JKL = 53° Use the tan–1 key, and round to the nearest
degree.
21. d. Use the Pythagorean theorem, a2 + b2 = c2. Set a = 10

, and c =
16
= 4, to get
102 + b2 = 42
10 + b2 = 16 Evaluate exponents.
10 + b2 – 10 = 16 – 10 Subtract 10 from both sides.
b2 = 6 Combine like terms.
b2 = 6 Take the square root of both sides.
b = 2.45 Rounded to the nearest hundredth.
adjacent
22. c. Draw in the sides based on the cosine ratio, , as shown:
hypotenuse
The sides indicate a multiple of the common Pythagorean triple,

{3, 4, 5}, that is {6, 8, 10}. The sine ratio of the given angle is
opposite 8
, or .
hypotenuse 10
23. c. From the picture, this is a right triangle problem, where the
hypotenuse is 17 and one of the sides is 8. You can use the
Pythagorean theorem, or you can recognize the common
Pythagorean triple of 8–15–17. The height where the ladder rests
against the building is 15 feet.
24. e. The figure shows an altitude drawn to the hypotenuse of a large

right triangle, forming two smaller right triangles. The three
right triangles are similar. Break the triangles apart to see the rela-
tionship of the sides.
EG is a shared side to both.

DG
EG
Set up the sides of the smaller triangles in a proportion:
EG =

FG
16 8
=
8 FG
16
FG = 8 8 Cross multiply.
16
FG = 64 Multiply on the right side.
= 4
FG Divide both sides by 16.
25. b. Draw a picture of the situation:
The height of the tree is represented as x, and is opposite to the

angle. The side measuring 15 feet is the side adjacent to the angle.
opposite
Use the tangent ratio, which is
adjacent .
x
tan 70° = 15 Set up the equation.
tan 70° 15 = x Multiply both sides by 15.
41 = x Use the tan key, and then multiply and
round.
10
Coordinate Geometry
I n the 1600s, Rene Descartes, a philosopher and mathematician,

developed a method of positioning a point in the plane by its distances,
x and y, from the intersection of two fixed lines drawn at right angles in
the plane. This plane came to be called the Cartesian plane, or simply, the
coordinate plane. This chapter reviews how this plane applies to geome-
try. Take the benchmark quiz to determine how much you remember
about coordinate geometry.
314
C O O R D I NATE G E O M ETRY 315
BENCHMARK QUIZ
1. What are the coordinates of point R on the graph below?
a. (5,3)
b. (–5,3)
c. (5,–3)
d. (3,5)
e. (–3,5)
2. One endpoint of a segment is (3,4). What is the other endpoint, if the

midpoint of the segment is (–1,3)?
a. (2,7)
b. (–3,12)
c. (1,3.5)
d. (–5,2)
e. (2,–5)
3. What is the distance between points (–3,–5) and (2,–2)?

a. 26
b. 52
c. 25
d. 34

e. 8
4. What is the area of the figure below, in square units?
a. 40 sq. units
b. 24 sq. units
c. 32 sq. units
d. 64 sq. units
e. 8 sq. units
5. What is the equation of the line on the graph below?
a. y = 3x + 4
b. y = –3x + 4
c. y = 4x + 3
d. y = 4x – 3
1
e. y = 3x + 4
6. What is the equation of a line that is perpendicular to the line y =

–4x + 5?
1
a. y = 4x + 5
1
b. y = –4x + 5
c. y = 4x + 5
d. y = –5x – 5
1
e. y = 4x – 3
7. Which graph shows a reflection of ΔABC over the line y = x?
a. Figure I
b. Figure II
c. Figure III
d. Figure IV
8. What is the solution to the system of equations shown below?
a. (3,–4)
b. (0,–2)
c. (0,–7)
d. (–4,3)
e. (–3,0)
9. What is the transformation shown in the graph below, from ΔABC to

its image ΔA´BĆ´?
a. T(–2,3)
b. RP,–90°
c. ry-axis
d. rx-axis
e. T(2,–3)
10. What is the equation of a line that is parallel to y = 7x – 15?

1
a. y = 7x – 15
b. y = 15x + 7
c. y = 7x – 8
d. y = –7x – 8
e. y = –7x + 3
1. e. Point R is three units to the left of the origin, so the x-coordinate

is –3 and it is 5 units above the origin, so the y-coordinate is 5.
The coordinates are (–3,5).
x1 + x2 y1 + y2
2. d. Use the midpoint formula to solve for x2 and y2: M = (2, 2).
x2 4+y
3 + 2 = –1 Use the midpoint formula. 2
2 =3
3 + x2 = –2 Multiply both sides by 2. 4 + y2 = 6
x2 = –2 – 3 Isolate the x and y. y2 = 6 – 4
x2 = –5 Combine like terms. y2 = 2
The coordinates are (–5,2)
3. d. Use the distance formula: D = (x

2 – x1)2 + (y
2 – y1)
2
D = (–3
) – 22
+ (–5,
– –2)2 or D = (–5)
2
+,
(–3)2 or
D = 25
+ 9 = 34.
1
4. c. Use the formula for the area of a trapezoid: A = 2h(b1 + b2). Count
the units for b1 (the base), b2 (the other base) and h (the height).
Base 1, b1, is 7 – –3 = 10 units long. Base 2, b2, is 6 – 0 = 6 units
long. The height, h, is 1 – –3 = 4 units long. Substitute in these
1 1
values to get: A = 2 4(10 + 6), or A = 2 64 = 32 square units.
5. b. The graphed line crosses the y-axis at (0,4), so the y-intercept is 4.

The slope can be calculated from the points (0,4) and (1,1), using
rise y2 – y1 4–1 3
=
run x2 – x1 = 0 – 1 = –1 = –3. The equation is y = –3x + 4.
6. e. The slope of a perpendicular line will have a slope that is the neg-
ative reciprocal of the given equation. The slope is the coefficient
before the variable x when the equation is in the form y = mx + b.
The slope of the given equation is –4. The negative reciprocal is
1
. Choice e is the only choice with this slope.
4
7. b. Figure II shows a reflection over the line y = x, which is shown

below:
Figure I is a reflection over the x-axis. Figure III is a reflection over

the y-axis. Figure IV is a translation.
8. a. The solution to the system is the coordinates of the point of inter-

section. This point is three units to the right of the origin, so the
x-coordinate is 3, and four units below the origin, so the y-coordi-
nate is –4. The coordinates are (3,–4).
9. a. This transformation is a slide in which each point slides two units

to the left (negative direction) and three units up (positive direc-
tion). This is T(–2,3).
10. c. The equation of a line parallel to the given equation will have the
same slope. The only equation that has the same slope, which is 7,
is choice c. When an equation is in the form y = mx + b, such as
these, the slope is the coefficient of the x variable.
BENCHMARK QUIZ RESULTS:
If you answered 8–10 questions correctly, you possess a solid foundation of

knowledge about coordinate geometry. Pay attention to the chapter side-
bars to be sure you have a full understanding of the various aspects of this
topic. Work through the Practice Quiz at the end of the chapter to ensure
your success.
If you answered 4–7 questions correctly, carefully read through the les-
son in this chapter to review the material and build your confidence. Work
carefully through the examples and pay attention to the sidebars that refer
you to definitions, hints, and shortcuts. Get additional practice on geome-
try by visiting the suggested websites and solving the Practice Quiz at the
end of the chapter.
If you answered 1–3 questions correctly, concentrate your efforts on
Chapter 10 topics. First, carefully read this chapter including the sidebars
and visual aids that will improve your comprehension. Go to the suggested
websites in the Extra Help sidebar in this chapter, which will provide
extended practice. You may also want to refer to Geometry Success in 20 Min-
utes a Day, published by LearningExpress. Lessons 17, 18, and 19 of this
book pertain to these concepts.
JUST IN TIME LESSON—COORDINATE GEOMETRY
The coordinate plane is a powerful tool when used in conjunction with

geometry and algebra. Study the contents of this chapter to gain important
knowledge and skills to prepare for your upcoming test. Chapter 10 topics
are:
• Ordered Pairs
• Midpoint
• Distance Between Two Points
• Geometric Figures in the Coordinate Plane
• Linear Equations
• Systems of Equations
• Slope—Special Relationships
• Transformations on the Coordinate Plane
ORDERED PAIRS
The coordinate plane is a grid created by the intersection of two perpen-

dicular number lines, called the x- and y-axes. The x-axis is a horizontal
number line and the y-axis is a vertical number line. There are four regions
created by this grid and axes, as shown in the following diagram:
The quadrants are named by Roman numerals; Quadrant I is in the

upper right corner. The other quadrants follow in a counterclockwise direc-
tion. The intersection of the axes, point O above, is called the origin. Points
exist in this two dimensional space in the coordinate plane. Points are
named in the coordinate plane by an ordered pair: (x-coordinate, y-
coordinate). The y-coordinate is ALWAYS named second. The x-coordi-
nate is the horizontal distance from the origin. Positive x-coordinates are
to the right of the origin and negative x-coordinates are to the left of the
origin. The y-coordinate is the vertical distance from the origin. Positive y-
coordinates are above the origin and negative y-coordinates are below the
origin. Each point has a unique location, as defined by its ordered pair. The
coordinates for the origin are (0,0). The following graph shows some points
and their ordered pair name:
Notice the signs of the ordered pairs and where they lie in the coordi-
nate plane:
In Quadrant I, all points have the sign (+x, +y).

In Quadrant II, all points have the sign (–x, +y).
In Quadrant III, all points have the sign (–x, –y).
In Quadrant IV, all points have the sign (+x, –y).
To find the ordered pair for a point, count how far away from the origin
the point is in the horizontal direction, and then count how far away from
the origin the point is in the vertical direction.
Example:
What are the coordinates (ordered pairs) for points A, B, and C
below?
Point A is 2 units to the right of the origin, and 3 units above the
origin. The coordinates of point A are (2,3). Point B is 4 units to the
left of the origin, and 2 units below the origin. The coordinates of
point B are (–4,–2). Point C is 1 unit to the right of the origin and 1
unit below the origin. The coordinates of point C are (1,–1).
MIDPOINT
Any two points determine a segment. Every segment has a midpoint. The
midpoint is exactly halfway between the two points.
RULE BOOK
E The coordinates of the midpoint of a segment, given the coordinates

x1 + x2 y1 + y2
of its endpoints as (x1, y1) and (x2, y2) is M = (2, 2).
Example:
What is the midpoint of the segment with endpoints A (–3,–5) and
B (–6,7)?
Use the midpoint formula:
–3 + –6 –5 + 7 –9 2
M = (2, 2), or M = ( 2, 2) = (–4.5,1).
This is evident from the graph:
You can use the midpoint formula to find a missing coordinate.
Example:
What is the endpoint, C, of a segment whose midpoint, M, is (7, 0)
and other endpoint is D (10,4)?
Use the midpoint formula to find x2 and y2:
10 + x 4+y
2 =7 Multiply both sides by 2 2 =0
2 2
10 + x2 = 14 Subtract from both sides 4 + y2 = 0
x2 = 4 y2 = –4
The other endpoint is (4,–4).
This segment and midpoint are shown on the previous graph.
DISTANCE BETWEEN TWO POINTS
The distance between two points in a coordinate plane can be calculated if

the coordinates of the points are known.
RULE BOOK
E —THE DISTANCE FORMULA

The distance between two points is given by the formula:
D = (x
2 – x(y
1) +
2
2 – y
1)
2
This is an important and useful formula in coordinate geometry. It is

based on the Pythagorean theorem, covered in Chapter 9.
Example:
What is the distance between A (8,6) and B (4,3)?
From the graph, the horizontal distance, h, and the vertical distance,
v, form the legs of a right triangle. The distance between the points
is the hypotenuse of the right triangle; h2 + v2 = distance2, and there-
fore h 2
+ v2 = distance. Distance h can be found by subtracting the
x-coordinate of one point from the x-coordinate of the other point.
Distance v can be found the same way using the y-coordinates.
When the points are shown graphed in the coordinate plane, you
can count the length of the horizontal and vertical distances. In the
above problem, h = 4 and v = 3. The distance is D = 4 2
+ 32 =
16
+ 9 = 25
= 5.
When working with the distance formula, you often must simplify rad-
icals. To simplify a radical, factor out all perfect square factors.
Example:
Simplify 200
.
= 2
200 100
= 2
10 = 102

Example:
Simplify 252
.
252
= 4
63
= 4
9
7
= 2 3 7
= 67

Simplifying radicals is often the last step in using the distance formula.
Example:
What is the distance between (–3,6) and (–7,–4)?
D = (–7)
–3 – (6
2
+ )
– –42 = 42
+ 102
D = 16
00
+ 1 = 116
, D = 4 29 = 229

SHORTCUT
" If the h(x2 – x1) and the v(y2 – y1) are the two smaller values in a com-
mon Pythagorean triple, the distance will be the largest value in that
triple set. Recall from Chapter 9, that the common Pythagorean triples
are: {3, 4, 5}, {5, 12, 13}, or {8, 15, 17}, and multiples thereof.
Example:
Find the distance between points L and N in the following graph.
(x2 – x1) = 8 – –4 = 12 and (y2 – y1) = 2 – –3 = 5. This is part of the

triple {5, 12, 13}. The distance is therefore 13 units.
GEOMETRIC FIGURES
IN THE COORDINATE PLANE
Polygons are created in the coordinate plane when various points are con-
nected to form the sides. You may be required to determine the area, length
of sides, length of diagonals, or length of altitudes of certain polygons.
Example:
What is the area of trapezoid PQRS?
Count the squares to find the lengths of b1 and b2. Base b1 is 9,

(6 – –3), units long; b2 is 5, (4 – –1), units long. The height can be
determined by counting the perpendicular length between the
bases, 2 – –4 = 6 units long. From Chapter 6, the formula for the
area of a trapezoid is: A = 1h(b1 + b2). Substitute in the values to get
1 2
A = 2 6(9 + 5) = 42 square units.
Example:
What is the length of the longer diagonal in parallelogram FGHI?
The length of the diagonal is the distance between point F (–6, 1)

and H (5,5). Use the distance formula: D = (x
2 – x1)2 + (y, 2
2 – y1) or
)
D = (–6 – 5–
2
+ (1 .
5) This simplifies to D = (–11)
2
+ 2
2
(–4) =
16
121 + = 137 units long.
This answer is simplified.
LINEAR EQUATIONS
The coordinate plane shows the infinite solutions to an equation in two

variables in picture form. For the equation y = 2x + 3, a table can be made
to show the values that satisfy the equation:
WHEN x = THEN Y = ORDERED PAIR SOLUTION

–2 2(–2) + 3 = –1 (–2,–1)
–1 2(–1) + 3 = 1 (–1,1)
0 2(0) + 3 = 3 (0,3)
1 2(1) + 3 = 5 (1,5)
These ordered pairs are then graphed, and joined to form a line. The line
is the set of infinite points that satisfy the equation.
When the line is extended, as shown dotted above, other ordered pairs
are defined that satisfy the equation, such as (–3,–3) and (2,7). Lines
graphed in the coordinate plane have certain characteristics, such as steep-
ness, and where the line crosses the y-axis and the x-axis.
GLOSSARY
SLOPE of a linear equation is the steepness of the line. It is the ratio of
the change in the y-coordinate’s value Δy y2 – y1 rise
, or Δx , or .
the change in the x-coordinate’s value x2 – x1 run
Y-INTERCEPT of a linear equation is the y-coordinate where the line crosses the y-axis.
It is the value of y when x = 0.
X-INTERCEPT of a linear equation is the x-coordinate where the line crosses the x-axis.
It is the value of x when y = 0.
The magnitude of the slope value determines the steepness of the line.
You can determine the slope of a line by first choosing two integer (integral)
values for the coordinates on the line. Count the change in y, the vertical
distance, and then the change in x, the horizontal distance. The slope will
Δy
be Δx .
The sign of the slope indicates whether the slope is “uphill” or “down-
hill,” when moving from left to right on the graph.
rise
It is helpful to think of slope as
run . Start at one integral ordered pair and
rise
determine how many units are traveled as you
run to reach another integral
point. If the movement is up, then the change in y is positive; if the move-
ment is down, then the change in y is negative. If the movement is right, the
change in x is positive; if the movement is left, the change in x is negative.
The sign of the slope will be determined by the integer rules for division
Δy
as Δx .
Example:
What is the slope and intercepts of the following graphed line?
The y-intercept is 2, (0,2), which is the value of y when x = 0, and

the x-intercept is 1, (2,0), which is the value of x when y = 0. Find
integral points, which is often the intercepts, to determine the slope.
To reach point (1,1) starting at the y-intercept, you rise –1 (down 1)
rise 1–2 –1
and run +1 (right 1). So the slope is
run = 1 – 0 = 1 = –1.
Example:
What is the slope and intercepts of the following graphed line?
The y-intercept is 0, which is the value of y when x = 0, and the x-

intercept is 0, which is the value of x when y = 0. The slope is deter-
mined from the shown integral points, from (0,0) to (2,3). Slope is
rise +3 3
= = .
run +2 2
The equation of a line, when in a special form called the slope-intercept

form, determines the slope and y-intercept of the graphed equation.
GLOSSARY
SLOPE-INTERCEPT FORM of an equation is the equation solved for y: y = mx + b,
where m and b are real numbers and x and y are variables.
Any equation in two variables can be expressed in slope-intercept form,

by isolating the y variable.
Example:
Express 3x + 2y = 17 in slope-intercept form.
Solve 3x + 2y = 17 for y:
3x + 2y – 3x = 17 – 3x Subtract 3x from both sides.
2y = –3x + 17 Combine like terms.
2y 3 17
= – 2x + 2 Divide all terms by 2.
2
3
y = – 2x + 8.5
RULE BOOK
E When an equation is in the slope-intercept form, y = mx + b, m is the

slope of the graphed equation, and b is the y-intercept of the graphed
equation.
Examples:
What is the y-intercept of the equation y = –7x – 5?
The y-intercept is (0,–5), which is –5, the b term. The slope of this
line is –7, the m term.
What is the y-intercept of the equation y = –7x?

There is no b term, so the line crosses at (0,0) and the y-intercept is
zero.
What is the slope of the equation x = 3?

This equation is not in slope-intercept form; there is no y variable.
The slope is undefined, or it is said to have no slope. This happens
to be a vertical line passing through the point (3,0).
What is the slope of y = –x + 6?

The m term in this example is –1, because the coefficient of the x term,
–1, is implied when only a negative sign is shown. The slope is –1.
What is the slope of y = 4?

There is no x variable; the slope is zero. This happens to be a hori-
zontal line passing through the point (0,4).
When an equation is in slope-intercept form you can graph the solution

in the coordinate plane without making a table. Use this procedure:
1. Graph the point, b, that is the y-intercept.

2. Graph a second point, using the slope, written as a fraction. The slope
rise
is run . Start at the y-intercept and then travel up or down, and left or
right as dictated by the ratio.
3. Graph another point, starting at the last point graphed, again using
rise
.
run
4. Connect the points into a line and label the line. Your points will form
a straight line.
Example:
Graph the linear equation y = –5x – 2.
In this equation, b = –2. Graph this point as the y-intercept at (0,–2).
5
Use the slope of –5 and write it as a ratio, –1. Graph the second
point using a rise of –5 (down 5) and a run of 1 (right 1) to reach the
point (1,–7).
Just as you can graph a line given the equation, you can also determine
the equation if given the graph:
1. Look at the graph to find the y-intercept. This is the value of b.

2. Pick two points on the graph that have integral coordinates and deter-
rise Δy
mine the
run = Δx ratio. This is the value of m.
3. The equation is y = mx + b.
Example:
What is the equation of the following graphed line?
The line crosses the y-axis at positive 3, so the value of b is 3. To get

from this point to another integral point on the graph (shown
rise
above), you travel down 1 (–1) and right 2 (+2). The slope is run =
–1 1 1
= –. The equation is y = –x + 3.
+2 2 2
SYSTEMS OF EQUATIONS
A system of equations is two or more equations that have related variables.

There are several ways to solve systems of equations, some of which are
beyond the scope of this book. One method, solving the system graphically,
is explained in this chapter. To solve a system of equations graphically, graph
each equation on the coordinate plane. The solution is the intersection of
the graphed lines. The solution will basically be an ordered pair to define
the point of intersection.
Example:
What is the solution to the following system of equations?
The graphed lines intersect at (1,3). This is the solution to the system.
When you solve a system of equations there can be one, none, or an
infinite number of solutions. When the lines intersect, they meet in
one point, which is one solution. When the lines are parallel they
will never meet, which means there is no solution. When the lines
are equivalent their graphs fall on top of each other, which is an infi-
nite number of solutions.
SLOPE—SPECIAL RELATIONSHIPS
rise
Slope is the ratio of run . There are two special slopes to be considered, the
slope of a horizontal line and the slope of a vertical line. A horizontal line has
a slope of zero. The y-coordinate, the rise, does not change. Any fraction
with zero in the numerator is equivalent to zero. A horizontal line has the
form y = b. A vertical line has a slope that is undefined, or sometimes said to
be “no slope”. The x-coordinate, the run, does not change. Any fraction with
zero in the denominator is undefined. A vertical line has the form x = c.
RULE BOOK
E PARALLEL LINES have equal slopes.

PERPENDICULAR LINES have slopes that are negative reciprocals of
each other.
Examples:
What is the equation of a line parallel to the line y = –5x + 11?
For lines to be parallel, they must have the same slope. Choose any
y-intercept, (value for b). One example of a parallel line is y = –5x + 1.
What is the equation of a line perpendicular to the line y = 3x – 4?

Perpendicular lines have slopes that are negative reciprocals of one
another. The slope of the given line is 3; the slope of the perpendi-
1
cular line is –3. Choose any y-intercept. One example of a perpendi-
1
cular line is y = –3x, which has a y-intercept of zero.
TRANSFORMATIONS ON THE COORDINATE PLANE
Chapter 8 described various transformations that can be performed on a

geometric figure. These transformations can be pictured on a coordinate
plane.
GLOSSARY
T (A ,B) a translation of a graphed polygon in which each point, (x,y), is shifted to the
point (x + a,y + b)
R X-A X I S a reflection of a geometric figure in the x-axis. The point (x,y) becomes (x,–y).
R Y-A X I S a reflection of a geometric figure in the y-axis. The point (x,y) becomes (–x,y).
R Y = X a reflection of a geometric figure in the line y = x (slope of 1, and y-intercept of
0). The point (x,y) becomes (y,x).
R P,9 0° a rotation of a geometric figure of 90° (a quarter turn) counterclockwise around

a point P. Point (x,y) becomes (–y,x).
R P,–9 0° a rotation of a geometric figure of 90° (a quarter turn) clockwise around a point
P. Point (x,y) becomes (y,–x).
R P,18 0° a rotation of a geometric figure of 180° (a half turn) around a point P. Point (x,y)
becomes (–x,–y).
R P,270° a rotation of a geometric figure of 270° (a three-quarter turn) counterclockwise
around a point P. This rotation is the same as RP,–90°.
R P,–270° a rotation of a geometric figure of 270° (a three-quarter turn) clockwise around
a point P. This is the same as RP,90°.
Example:
The following figure shows a translation of ΔABC of T(3,2) marked
ΔA'B'C' and a translation of parallelogram EFGH of T(–3,–1) marked
E'F'G'H'. Note that point C on the triangle, (–1,1), for example,
moves to point C', (–1 + 3,1 + 2), or (2,3). Point E, (3,–1) moves to
E', (3 – 3,–1 –1), or (0,–2).
The next figure shows a reflection of ΔABC of ry-axis marked ΔA'B'C'

and a reflection of rx-axis marked ΔA"B"C".
The next figure shows a rotation of ΔABC of RP,–90° marked ΔA'B'C'

and a rotation of ΔABC of RP,180° marked ΔA"B"C".
EXTRA HELP
O If you need further help in working with coordinate geometry, refer to
the book Geometry Success in 20 Minutes a Day, published by
LearningExpress.
There are also Internet resources that will help you to master this topic:
1. The website http://library.thinkquest.org/20991/geo/coord-
geo.html is a tutorial on the basic concepts of graphing in the coor-
dinate plane.
2. http://www.shodor.org/interactivate/activities/transform/index.html
is an interactive activity to study transformations in the coordinate
plane.
3. http://www.wtamu.edu/academic/anns/mps/math/mathlab/
beg_algebra/ has lessons on the coordinate plane and graphing
equations. Scroll down to tutorials 20–25.
TIPS AND STRATEGIES
• The coordinate plane is a grid formed by horizontal and vertical

number lines that intersect at the point called the origin.
• The coordinate plane is divided into four quadrants.
• An ordered pair (x,y) defines a point in the coordinate plane as the
horizontal distance, x, from the origin and the vertical distance, y,
from the origin.
• In Quadrant I the coordinates have the sign (+,+ ).
• In Quadrant II the coordinates have the sign (–,+).
• In Quadrant III the coordinates have the sign (–, –).
• In Quadrant IV the coordinates have the sign (+,–).
• The midpoint is the point halfway between two endpoints of a
segment.
• The distance between two points in the coordinate plane is found
by using the distance formula.
• Geometric polygons reside in the coordinate plane.
• Area, side length, diagonal length, and height can be calculated
using coordinates of endpoints.
Δy rise
• The slope of a linear equation is the ratio of Δx =
run .
• The y-intercept is the value of y when x = 0, where a graphed equa-
tion crosses the y-axis.
• The slope-intercept form of a line, y = mx + b, determines the slope
and the y-intercept of a graphed line.
• A system of equations can be solved graphically by finding the inter-
section of the graphed lines.
• Parallel lines have equal slopes.
• Perpendicular lines have slopes that are negative reciprocals of each
other.
• Horizontal lines have a slope of zero.
• Vertical lines have no slope, or a slope that is undefined.
• Geometric figures can be transformed on the coordinate plane.
PRACTICE QUIZ
1. In which quadrant does the point (–4,–6) lie?

a. Quadrant I
b. Quadrant II
c. Quadrant III
d. Quadrant IV
e. Quadrant V
2. What are the coordinates of the point M shown below?
a. (–5,2)
b. (5,2)
c. (2,–5)
d. (–2,5)
e. (–2,–5)
3. What are the coordinates of the midpoint of the segment joined by

(–7,–4) and (–1,5)?
a. (–4,4.5)
b. (4.5,–4)
c. (–3,0.5)
d. (–3,4.5)
e. (–4,0.5)
4. One endpoint of a segment is (–8,–2). What is the other endpoint, if

the midpoint of the segment is (0,0)?
a. (2,8)
b. (8,2)
c. (–4,–1)
1 1
d. (8,2)
e. (4,1)
5. What is the distance between the points (1,4) and (4,8)?

a. 5
b. 13
c. 13

d. 5
e. 17
6. What is the length of the diagonal in the graph of the square below?
a. 42
b. 8
c. 8
d. 32
e. 4
7. In the following graph, what is the area of ΔPQR?
a. 7 sq. units
b. 28 sq. units
c. 14 sq. units
d. 10.5 sq. units
e. 0.5 sq. units
8. What is the length of the height of trapezoid ABCD on the follow-

ing graph?
units
a. 37
b. 6 units
c. 42 units
d. 32 units
e. 8 units
9. What is the length of the segment whose endpoints are (–2,–3) and
(6,–1)?
units
a. 217
b. 68 units
c. 32
units
d. 32 units
e. 45 units
10. What is the equation of the line shown in the following graph?
a. y = –2x + 2
1
b. y = –4x + 2
1
c. y = 2x – 4
d. y = –4x – 2
1
e. y = 2x + 2
11. What is the equation of a line that is parallel to the graph of line
y = 3x – 6?
a. y = –6x + 3
1
b. y = –3x + 2
c. y = 3x + 6
d. y = –3x – 6
1
e. y = 3x – 6
12. Which is the slope of the following graphed line?
2
a. 3
b. 5
c. 3
3
d. 2
e. –5
13. What is the y-intercept of the following graphed line?
2
a.
3
3
b.
2
c. 3
d. 2
e. –3
14. What is the equation of a line perpendicular to the graphed line in the
following graph?
a. y = –3x + 2
1
b. y = –3x + 2
c. y = 3x – 2
d. y = x – 2
e. y = –x + 4
15. What is the solution to the system of equations shown in the follow-
ing graph?
a. (3,0)
b. (0,3)
c. (–2,0)
d. (0,–2)
e. (0,–5)
16. What is the slope of the following line?
a. 0
b. undefined
c. 2
3
d. 4
e. 1
17. What is the area of the parallelogram shown below?
a. 25 square units

b. 16 square units
c. 20 square units
d. 8 square units
e. 12 square units
18. What is the length of the diagonal of rectangle ABCD shown following?
a. 61
units
b. 20.5 units
c. 30.5 units
d. 41
units
e. 50
units
19. What is the area of trapezoid LMNO?
a. 40 square units
b. 48 square units
c. 54 square units
d. 24 square units
e. 42 square units
20. Which transformation is shown in the following figure from ABCD

to A´BĆ´D´?
a. ry = x
b. RP,90°
c. rx-axis
d. ry-axis
e. T(10,0)
21. Which of the following figures shows a rotation of 90° clockwise,

from ABC to A´BĆ´?
a. Figure I
b. Figure II
c. Figure III
d. Figure IV
22. What is the equation of the following graphed line?
a. y = x
b. y = –x + 1
c. y = –x – 1
d. y = –x
e. The equation is not shown.
23. What is the equation of the following graphed line?
a. y = 7
b. y = –7
c. x = –7
d. x = 7
e. y = x + 7
24. What is the transformation shown in the following graph of ABCD

and its image A´BĆ´D´?
a. RP,–180°
b. T(–2,3)
c. T(3,–2)
d. rx-axis
e. ry = x
25. What is the solution to the following graphed system of equations?
a. (1,0)
b. (0,1)
c. (–3,–2)
d. (3,–2)
e. (–2,–3)
ANSWERS
1. c. This point has coordinates that are both negative, and thus lies in
Quadrant III.
2. a. Point M is five units to the left of the origin, so the x-coordinate

is –5. Point M is two units above the origin, so the y-coordinate is
2. The coordinates are (–5,2).
x1 + x2 y1 + y2
3. e. Use the midpoint formula: M = (2,2):
– 7 + –1 –4 + 5 –8 1
M = (2,2) = (2,2). This is (–4,0.5).
x1 + x2 y1 + y2
4. b. Use the midpoint formula: M = (2,2) to solve for the vari-
ables x2 and y2:
–8 + x –2 + y2
2 =0 Use the midpoint formula. 2 = 0
2
–8 + x2 = 0 Multiply both sides by 2. –2 + y2 = 0
x2 = 0 + 8 Isolate the x and y. y2 = 0 + 2
x2 = 8 Combine like terms. y2 = 2
The coordinates are (8,2).
5. d. Use the distance formula: D = (x

2 – x1)2 + (y
2 – y1)
2
D = (1
– 4)2+ (4 –,
8)2 or D = (–3)
2
+,
(–4)2 or D = 9
+ 16 =
25
= 5 units.
6. a. Use the coordinates of opposite vertices and the distance formula

to find the length of the diagonal: D = (x2 – x1
)2 + (y, 2
2 – y1) and
the vertices are (3,3) and (–1,–1).
D = (3
)– –1–
2
+ (3 ,
–1)2 or D = (4)
4) 2
+ (,
2
or D = 16
6 + 1 =
32
. This can be simplified to 42 units.
1
7. c. Use the formula for the area of a triangle: A = 2bh. Count the
units for b (the base) and h (the height). The base is 4 – –3 = 7
units long. The height, h, is 2 – –2 = 4 units long. Substitute in
1
these values to get: A = 2 7 4, or 14 square units.
8. c. Find the length of the height of the trapezoid by using the coor-
dinates of the endpoints of the height, which are (0,0) and (–4,4).
The distance formula is: D = (x
2 – x1 )2 + (y, 2
2 – y1) or
D = (0)– –4–2
+ (0 ,
4) or D = (4)
2
–4)2
+ (, or D = 16
2
6+ 1
= 32
. This simplifies to 42 units long.
9. a. Use the distance formula: D = (x

2 – x1)2 + (y, 2
2 – y1) or
D = (–2
) – 62
+ (–3,
– –1) or D = (–8)
2
2
+(–2) = 68
2
.
units long.
This simplifies to 217
10. b. The graphed line crosses the y-axis at (0,2), so the y-intercept is 2.
The slope can be calculated from the points (0,2) and (4,1), using
rise y2 – y1 2–1 1 1 1
=
run x2 – x1 = 0 – 4 = –4 = – 4 . The equation is y = – 4 x + 2.
11. c. The equation of a line parallel to the given equation will have the
same slope. The only equation that has the same slope, which is 3,
is choice c. When an equation is in the form y = mx + b, such as
these, the slope is the coefficient of the x variable.
12. d. The slope can be calculated from the points (0,0) and (2,3), using
rise y2 – y1 3–0 3
=
run x2 – x1 = 2 – 0 = 2 .
13. e. The y-intercept is the value of y when x = 0, or where the graphed

line crosses the y-axis. This is at the point (0, –3). The y-intercept
is –3.
14. b. The slope of a perpendicular line will have a slope that is the neg-
ative reciprocal of the given equation. The slope of the given
equation is calculated by using two of the integral points shown,
rise y2 – y1 1–4
such as (0,4) and (–1,1). Calculate the slope:
run = x2 – x1 = –1 – 0 =
–3 1
, which is 3 . The negative reciprocal is – . Choice b is the only
–1 3
choice with this slope, the coefficient before the variable x when
the equation is in the form y = mx + b.
section. This point is three units to the right of the origin, so the
x-coordinate is 3, and zero units from the origin in the vertical
direction, so the y-coordinate is 0. The coordinates are (3,0).
16. a. The slope of a horizontal line is always zero. There is a zero

change in the y-coordinates, which is the numerator of the slope
ratio.
17. b. Use the formula for the area of a parallelogram: A = bh. Use the
vertical side as the base, and count the units in length (using the y-
coordinates). It is 1 – –3 = 4 units long. The height is the horizon-
tal distance between the points (using the x-coordinates). It is
5 – 1 = 4 units high. The area is 4 4 = 16 square units.
18. d. Use the distance formula on the coordinates of the opposite ver-
tices, such as (–1, 1) and (–5, –4). The distance formula is D =
(x 2 – xy
1) + (
2
2 – y1), or D = (–5
2
1) – –42
+ (–,
– 1)2 or D =
(–4)
2
+(–5)2 = 165 + 2 = 41
units long.
1
19. e. Use the formula for the area of a trapezoid: A = 2h(b1 + b2). The
bases are vertical in this trapezoid. Count the units for b1 (the
base), b2 (the other base) and the h (the height). Base 1, b1, (using
y-coordinates) is 6 – –4 = 10 units long. Base 2, b2, (using y-coor-
dinates) is 6 – 2 = 4 units long. The height, h, (using the x-coordi-
nates) is the top side of the trapezoid, 3 – –3 = 6 units long.
1 1
Substitute in these values to get: A = 2 6(10 + 4), or A = 2 84
= 42 square units.
20. d. This is a reflection, or a flip, over the y-axis. This is denoted by

ry-axis.
21. b. Figure II shows a rotation of 90° clockwise. Figure I is a rotation

of 180°. Figure III is a rotation of –270°, and Figure IV is a trans-
lation of 1 unit right and 3 units down.
22. d. The graphed line crosses through the origin, so the y-coordinate
is 0. The slope can be calculated from the points (0,0) and (–1,1),
rise y2 – y1 1–0 1
using
run = x2 – x1 = –1 – 0 = –1 = –1. The equation, in y = mx + b form,
is y = –x, since the y-intercept is 0 and the slope, –1 is implied by
writing –x.
23. a. This is the graph of a horizontal line, which has the form y = b.
The y-intercept is 7, so the equation is y = 7.
24. e. This is the reflection of the polygon over the line y = x, denoted
by ry = x. The line of reflection is shown:
section. This point is one unit to the right in the horizontal direc-
tion, so the x-coordinate is 1, and zero units above the origin, so the
y-coordinate is 0. The coordinates of the solution point are (1,0).

Just in Time Geometry

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Just in Time Geometry

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Just in Time Geometry

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What is the book about?

What is the book about?

What are some important geometry concepts discussed in the book?

What are some important geometry concepts discussed in the book?

S

All rights reserved under International and Pan-American Copyright Conven-

Library of Congress Cataloging-in-Publication Data:

Printed in the United States of America

For more information or to place an order, contact LearningExpress at:

Catherine V. Jeremko is a certiﬁed secondary mathematics teacher in New

Formula Cheat Sheet ix

VOLUME V = b h (the area of the base times the height)

the change in the y-coordinate’s value Δy

THE JUST IN TIME TEST-PREP APPROACH

At LearningExpress, we know the importance that is placed on test

• a ten-question benchmark quiz to help you assess your knowledge

• sample problems with full explanations

Our Just in Time series also includes the following features:

• Extra Help sidebars that refer you to other Learning-

• Calculator Tips: offers hints on how your calculator can

Glossary sidebars with key deﬁnitions

Shortcut sidebars with tips for reducing your study

• A Formula Cheat Sheet with common formulas for last-minute test

HOW TO USE THIS BOOK

geometric ﬁgures. The material in Chapters 6 and 7 is concerned with geo-

• Chapter 1: Study Skills reviews fundamental study strategies

• Did you simply know the right answer?

◗ Target Your Test

• What material is covered?

◗ Match Your Abilities to Your Test

◗ Consider Your Options

◗ Analyze Your Schedule

How you study is just as important as how long—especially if your time is

◗ Sleep Well, Eat Right, and Relax

◗ The Right Tools for the Job

• a notebook or legal pad dedicated to studying for your test

◗ Your Learning Style

1. If you have to remember an unusual word, you most likely

2. When you meet new people, you remember them mostly by

3. In class you like to

A visual learner would answer a, c, and c. An auditory learner would

asking questions, making notes, and marking passages instead of simply

• Flashcards. Just making the cards alone is a way of engaging with

◗ Studying with Others

• Motivation. If you commit to working with someone else, you are

There are also some disadvantages to studying with others:

• Stress of competition. Some study partners can be overly com-

JUST THE FACTS . . . JUST IN TIME

◗ Building a Study Plan

of my favorite show”—interfere with your ability to study effec-

• Visualization. Remind yourself of what you will gain from doing

Use the drawing below to answer questions 1 through 4.

1. Which set of points is NOT coplanar?

2. Which lines are skew lines?

3. Which lines are NOT parallel?

4. Which lines are perpendicular?

is 28 inches, the measure of

6. If the measure of ∠WYZ = 35° and

8. Given the ﬁgure below, which of the following is true?

9. Which is the classiﬁcation of the angle?

In this example, Q is the midpoint of